<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>http://35.168.49.54/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Pwstagingadmin</id>
	<title>PocketWizard Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://35.168.49.54/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Pwstagingadmin"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php/Special:Contributions/Pwstagingadmin"/>
	<updated>2026-05-26T05:08:38Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.6</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Understanding_HyperSync_and_High_Speed_Sync&amp;diff=1585</id>
		<title>Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Understanding_HyperSync_and_High_Speed_Sync&amp;diff=1585"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|HyperSync|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;This section describes how HyperSync and High Speed Sync work at a basic level. Read the [[HyperSync Setup]] page for more detailed information on how to adjust HyperSync for your configuration.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is Flash Sync?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding flash to your photography can dramatically impact your images. Relying on natural light is nice for some images but the ability to place the light where you want it can take your photography to new levels. The ability to &amp;quot;put the sun where you want it&amp;quot; when it&#039;s a cloudy day, adding a backlight to a portrait to make the subject &amp;quot;pop&amp;quot;, or even just adding a tiny bit of fill flash to illuminate a dark spot can improve your images and create an entirely new look. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When shooting with flash, it is critical to ensure that the flash and shutter sync properly. If a flash is not in sync with the shutter, the result will be either an underexposed image without the flash or possible dark banding if the sync timing is not correct. There are different methods of synchronizing the flash with a camera’s shutter. These methods depend primarily on the shutter speed and flashes you use. While the flash appears instantaneous to our eyes, it actually has duration and variance. These are important to the camera’s sensor, especially at faster shutter speeds and will impact the results of your image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===X-Sync===&lt;br /&gt;
When the camera takes a photo, it sends a signal through the hot shoe and/or PC port of the camera to tell the flash to fire. Every camera has a specific maximum speed where the flash will be in sync with the photo. If the shutter speed is faster than X-sync, the result will be a dark band in the image (which is the result of the back of the shutter curtain) or a completely missed sync with no flash visible in the image. You can find your camera&#039;s X-sync in the specification part of the camera&#039;s instruction manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At shutter speeds slower than X-sync (usually 1/200 or 1/250), a normal flash of light is all that is required: the camera is told to fire, the first curtain of the shutter opens and sends the signal to the hot shoe and/or Pc port, the flash fires for its flash duration, and the second curtain of the shutter closes, resulting in the flash syncing properly with the exposure. Please see the [[#X-sync_-_Flash_behavior_with_normal_sync_limits|&#039;&#039;&#039;X-Sync&#039;&#039;&#039;]] section below for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At shutter speeds faster than X-sync (usually 1/250 through 1/8000) the time between the shutter’s first curtain opening and second curtain closing is not long enough for a normal flash of light to complete its duration. At the fastest shutter speeds, the second curtain starts to close before the first curtain is fully out of the way. The shutter’s curtains are moving at the same time, exposing a moving slit of light across the sensor, like a copier, and the sensor never fully exposed at one time. At these shutter speeds, you may be able to use other flash techniques to properly sync the flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===High Speed Sync (HSS)===&lt;br /&gt;
High Speed Sync (HSS or Auto-FP sync) is one way to enable flash sync over your camera&#039;s maximum X-sync. It begins pulsing or strobing the flash before the first curtain opens and continues to pulse it until after the second curtain closes. From the camera’s perspective, this pulsed light appears as continuous light during the exposure. HSS uses a lot of energy, however, which means there is less light available for the image, and is usually only available in lower powered Speedlites/Speedlights. Syncing up to 1/8000 is possible, but the flash must be very close to the subject. Faster shutter speeds require a lot more energy from the flash and faster pulsing, resulting in a lower powered flash burst.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To perform HSS, the camera must be able to send the specific timing information to start and stop the pulsing and the flash must be able to perform the pulsing. HSS was originally limited to speedlights though some strobes now have the ability to perform the special function. HSS requires TTL communication both from the camera and to the flash. It is typically only available within a closed manufacturing system, for example, a Nikon camera can use Nikon&#039;s CLS to trigger FP Sync in a Nikon flash but it cannot trigger HSS in a Godox strobe. The PocketWizard ControlTL radios can be used for HSS with compatible Nikon and Canon cameras and their respective speedlights. Please see the [[#High_Speed_Sync|&#039;&#039;&#039;High Speed Sync&#039;&#039;&#039;]] section below for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===HyperSync===&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync is another way to sync a flash faster than your camera&#039;s X-sync but it works differently than HSS. It uses a normal single burst of light, which has much more energy in it and will yield a much higher powered flash burst than using HSS. HyperSync uses precision timing to align the flash’s duration and output curve with the moving shutter curtains. This allows more light in the image than HSS can provide, and works with higher powered flashes like studio flash packs and monolights. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For most HyperSync applications, you can use both the main burst of the initial flash as well as the &#039;fade down&#039; from the pack to cover the sensor. The &#039;fade down&#039; may show as a gradient shadow in the image, almost like a graduated neutral density filter. If you are shooting outside in bright light, you may even be able to use the gradient to your advantage. You should be able to find the duration of your flash in the flash&#039;s instruction manual. Changing power levels on the flash will also change the flash duration. Most (but not all) flashes have the longest duration at full power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Different flash and camera combinations yield different shutter speed and light output performance, but most combinations will get worthwhile benefits using HyperSync. It is best to use a flash with a long duration, as using flashes with longer durations can result in being able to sync your camera at faster shutter speeds. To perform HyperSync, it requires TTL communication from the camera. You need to use a ControlTL radio on the camera but any PocketWizard radio can be used as a receiver. Please see the [[#HyperSync|&#039;&#039;&#039;HyperSync&#039;&#039;&#039;]] section below for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other techniques, like the &amp;quot;HSS Hack&amp;quot; (with or without a manually dialed in delay), can sometimes get a normal flash of light from a studio pack into an exposure taken at faster shutter speeds, but these methods are less precise than HyperSync, lack automation, and are more limited to which camera and flash combinations yield usable results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What HyperSync results can I get with my camera and flash? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thankfully, we have done a lot of the work for you by sharing images that we have captured using as many combinations of camera and flash model as possible. Our examples are available below. Simply click on your camera and find the flash that you wish to use with HyperSync. There are countless combinations of flashes and cameras in the world, and we will add more cameras and flashes as time goes by. If you don&#039;t see your equipment, feel free to contact us directly: http://www.pocketwizard.com/contact/inquiry/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{C HATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{N HATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Read the [[HyperSync Setup]] page for more detailed information on how to adjust HyperSync.&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Don&#039;t see your gear?}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How Does a Flash Work? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A flash is designed to emit a very intense light for a short duration of time. This is done by filling a flashtube with xenon gas, and then using a charged capacitor to energize the xenon with a very high amount of electrical current. This produces the light that flashes use to illuminate a scene. You can visualize a single flash event as “light over time,” plotted as a curve. The peak has the highest amount of energy emitted but energy continues to be emitted at a decreasing rate so long as the xenon gas is energized. This drop in energy (and therefore light output) creates the “tail” of the curve. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ranger RX 7.5 Power Flash Duration.JPG|400px|center|frameless|Typical flash duration simulation - Ranger RX pack with the S head at full power]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Typical flash duration simulation - Ranger RX pack with the S head at full power&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While appearing to be instantly turned on and instantly turned off again, a flashtube can be excited for anywhere from 1 microsecond to tens of milliseconds. Most consumer flashes usually average around 1 millisecond, with some being longer, and some being shorter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How Does a Shutter Work? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A camera’s shutter has two curtains that cover the sensor. When you press the shutter button, the first curtain moves, exposing the sensor. Next, the second curtain moves, finishing the exposure. Your first curtain opens all the way before the second curtain starts to move. This fully exposes the camera’s sensor. Your camera has a limit where it can fully open its shutter and capture a normal flash duration across the entire exposure all at once. This is your camera’s X-sync limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:X-SyncShutter.gif|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;A simulated shutter at X-sync&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shutter speeds above X-sync act differently. The first curtain begins to move downwards. Before they reach the bottom, the second curtain begins to move. This creates a moving slit. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MediumShuttersAboveX-Sync.gif|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;A simulated shutter above X-sync]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The faster the shutter speed, the smaller the slit:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FastestShuttersAboveX-Sync.gif|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Faster shutter speeds have smaller slits&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== X-sync - Flash behavior with normal sync limits ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== A flash directly connected to a camera ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your camera has a limit where it can fully open its shutter and capture flash across the entire sensor all at once. This is your camera’s X-sync limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A camera triggering a flash at X-sync follows this timeline:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The shutter button is pressed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Several milliseconds of time pass. This is called lag time. The amount of lag time varies from camera to camera.&lt;br /&gt;
#The first curtain moves from the top of the sensor to the bottom. The camera’s sensor is exposed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Some microseconds of time pass. The camera triggers its PC terminal and the center sync pin on the hot shoe.&lt;br /&gt;
#The flash emits light for its flash duration. The time this happens can be any amount of time up to a few milliseconds.&lt;br /&gt;
#The second curtain moves from the top of the sensor to the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
#The second curtain in the camera closes and both curtains reset to the top of the sensor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;gallery perrow=2 widths=300px caption=&amp;quot;Timing Sequence at X-sync&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:X-sync_shutter_sequence.JPG|Shutter Sequence at X-sync&lt;br /&gt;
File:5DMarkII_1.200.JPG|Ranger RX (S Head) at full power, 5D Mark II 1/200th f/22. This is a photo of a white wall to demonstrate no clipping or gradation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shutter speeds above X-sync work differently.  A camera triggering a flash above X-sync follows this timeline:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The shutter button is pressed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Several milliseconds of time pass. This is called lag time. The amount of lag time varies from camera to camera.&lt;br /&gt;
#The first curtain begins expose the sensor as it moves from top to bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
#Before the first curtain reaches the bottom of the sensor, the second curtain begins to move. The space between the first and second curtain is a small slit that moves across the sensor. The faster your shutter speed, the smaller the slit becomes.&lt;br /&gt;
#The first curtain reaches the bottom of the sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
#The camera triggers its PC terminal and the center sync pin on the hot shoe. (Many cameras do not provide this sync output above X-sync.)&lt;br /&gt;
#The flash emits light for its flash duration. The time this happens can be any amount of time up to a few milliseconds.&lt;br /&gt;
#The moving slit is exposed to the flash.&lt;br /&gt;
#The second curtain in the camera closes and both curtains reset to the top of the sensor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a camera connected directly to a flash via sync cable is used above X-sync the second curtain blocks part of the sensor from being exposed to light. This shows up as a black band, or clipping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;gallery perrow=2 widths=300px caption=&amp;quot;Timing Sequence at 1/8000th With a Sync Cord&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Non-hypersync_1.8000.JPG|border|Sync Cord Timing Sequence at 1/8000th&lt;br /&gt;
File:IMG 4812.JPG|Ranger RX (S Head) at full power, 5D Mark II 1/8000th f/22. This photo shows a tiny sliver of white flash exposure at the top, while the rest of the sensor has been blocked by the second curtain.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The timing sequence has tighter tolerances at X-sync compared to slower speeds. This tighter tolerance and the radio processing delay moves the moment the sensor sees the flash. Since the second curtain has started to move a small bit, on a very small number of cameras you get shadowing or clipping in your exposure. Flashes with long durations can show clipping at X-sync. Cameras with slow shutters can show clipping at X-sync. To get rid of clipping, you may have to use a slower shutter speed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The PlusX, Plus III, or MultiMAX have a mode to reduce this delay, called [[Transmit Only]]. A receiving Plus III can use [[FAST mode]] to reduce processing time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== [[High Speed Sync]] ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
High Speed Sync (HSS) is a Canon technique for syncing flash above X-sync. HSS is called Auto-FP in the Nikon system. This is a speedlight-only technique that pulses light above X-sync. This appears to the camera as a continuous light at faster shutter speeds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A camera and flash using HSS/Auto-FP follow this timeline:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The shutter button is pressed.&lt;br /&gt;
#Several milliseconds of time pass. This is called lag time. The amount of lag time varies from camera to camera.&lt;br /&gt;
#The speedlight begins to pulse light just before the first curtain begins to move. &lt;br /&gt;
#The first curtain begins to move from the top of the sensor to the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
#The camera’s sensor is exposed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Before the first curtain reaches the bottom of the sensor, the second curtain begins to move. The space between the first and second curtain is a small slit that moves across the sensor. The faster your shutter speed, the smaller the slit becomes.&lt;br /&gt;
#The speedlight continues to pulse.&lt;br /&gt;
#The first curtain reaches the bottom of the sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
#The second curtain in the camera closes and both curtains reset to the top of the sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
#The speedlight stops pulsing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FP_Sync_Optical.jpg|400px|center|frameless|HSS Pulses at various shutter speeds within the Canon Optical communications system]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;600EX-RT&#039;s HSS Performance at 1/8000th in a 1D Mark III&#039;s shoe without any radios&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HSS/Auto FP requires a speedlight. Studio strobes are not capable of pulsing light. HSS requires special timing information from the camera. This information is communicated through the TTL pins of a camera&#039;s hot shoe. A normal studio flash cannot perform the light pulse technique.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HSS exposures will not be as bright as standard single-pop flashes, because the available energy is divided among all the pulses over exposure time. The pulsed light requires more energy than non-pulsed flash. Flashes using HSS may need to be positioned closer to a subject.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== [[HyperSync]] ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A normal, non-HSS flash is more efficient at delivering light to a subject than an HSS (pulsed) flash. As a result, flashes may be positioned farther from a subject.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync uses special camera communication to trigger a normal flash before the first curtain opens. It can also eliminate the delay introduced by a typical radio trigger. The timing can be optimized for some flashes based on the user’s wishes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A camera triggering a flash with HyperSync follows this timeline:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The shutter button is pressed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Several milliseconds of time pass. This is called lag time. The amount of lag time varies from camera to camera.&lt;br /&gt;
#The attached MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 senses exactly when the shutter will fire, and then fires the flash early.&lt;br /&gt;
#The first curtain begins to move from the top of the sensor to the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
#The camera’s sensor is exposed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Before the first curtain reaches the bottom of the sensor, the second curtain begins to move. The space between the first and second curtain is a small slit. The faster the shutter speed is set the smaller the slit will become.&lt;br /&gt;
#The first curtain reaches the bottom of the sensor.&lt;br /&gt;
#The camera triggers its PC terminal and the center sync pin on the hot shoe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync requires a ControlTL transmitter like the [[Nikon MiniTT1 and FlexTT5]] or [[Canon MiniTT1 and FlexTT5]]. Optimizing HyperSync Automation require a ControlTL receiver like the [[PowerMC2]], [[PowerST4]], or [[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]]. All transmitter HyperSync adjustments are made in the [[PocketWizard Utility]] on the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]].  Any PocketWizard radio can be used as a receiver and be triggered from the ControlTL transmitter&#039;s HyperSync timing. You will see the best results using a ControlTL receiver.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two methods of using HyperSync Automation available on a ControlTL receiver: [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync#Reduced Clipping|Reduced Clipping]] and [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync#Highest Energy|Highest Energy]]. The two methods choose different flash firing times relative to the camera&#039;s shutters opening.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reduced Clipping=== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reduced Clipping attempts to keep bottom frame clipping out of your images. Reduced Clipping may result in a gradient across the image. Gradation means the photo is lighter at the bottom and darker at the top.  The results are very usable in many situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;gallery perrow=2 widths=300px caption=&amp;quot;Reduced Clipping&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Reduced_clipping_offset.JPG|HyperSync Offset for &amp;quot;Reduced Clipping&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
File:IMG_0282.JPG|Ranger RX (S Head) at full power, 5D Mark II 1/8000th f/22&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reduced Clipping benefits photographers:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Shooting outdoors where the sky is a major factor in the top part of the image&lt;br /&gt;
*Using aperture priority in conditions that cause the shutter speed to go above X-sync&lt;br /&gt;
*In any situation where the full frame must be used and cropping is not an option&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Reduced Clipping&amp;quot; is selected on the ControlTL receiver, as shown in on the [[HyperSync Setup#All ControlTL Radios – HyperSync Automation|All ControlTL Radios – HyperSync Automation]] page. This is the factory default setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can achieve similar results to  [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync#Reduced Clipping|Reduced Clipping]] &#039;&#039;&#039;manually&#039;&#039;&#039; with a non-ControlTL compatible flash by following the directions for the [[HyperSync Setup#How to Configure the Receiving FlexTT5 P2 Port|FlexTT5 P2 Port]] and trying to eliminate clipping at your &#039;&#039;&#039;highest&#039;&#039;&#039; shutter speeds.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can achieve similar results to [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync#Reduced Clipping|Reduced Clipping]] &#039;&#039;&#039;manually&#039;&#039;&#039; with a radio receiving on a [[Channels#Standard Channels|Standard Channel]] (meaning a ([[Plus II]], [[Plus III]], [[PlusX]], [[MultiMAX]], [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|FlexTT5 in Basic Trigger Mode]]), or internal PocketWizard receiver built in to your flash.) This is done by following the directions for the [[HyperSync Setup#How to Configure the ControlTL Transmitter - HyperSync Flash Duration For Standard Channels|How to Configure the ControlTL Transmitter - HyperSync Flash Duration For Standard Channels]] section, and trying to eliminate clipping at your &#039;&#039;&#039;highest&#039;&#039;&#039; shutter speeds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Using Speedlites or the Einstein E-640 for HyperSync  with HyperSync is most effective at full power with these flashes because of their IGBT design. HSS/Auto-FP is suggested for users shooting above X-sync with Speedlites. For more information, consult the flash manufacturer&#039;s documentation on flash duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Read the [[HyperSync Setup]] page for more detailed information on how to adjust HyperSync.&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Highest Energy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highest Energy attempts to get as much flash energy into the image as possible. This will reduce gradation at lower HyperSync speeds, however it can result in black bars or clipping in the frame at the highest shutter speeds. For many situations this can yield useful results as clipping can be cropped out of the image, or the clipping area is exposed by ambient light primiarily.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;gallery perrow=2 widths=300px caption=&amp;quot;Highest Energy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Highest energy offset.JPG|HyperSync Offset for &amp;quot;Highest Energy&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
File:IMG 4015.JPG|Ranger RX (S Head) at full power, 5D Mark II 1/8000th f/22&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highest Energy benefits photographers:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Using HyperSync speeds just above X-sync &lt;br /&gt;
*Who need as much action stopping flash power in the image as possible (remember that for HyperSync, longer flash durations are better)&lt;br /&gt;
*Where gradation is not acceptable&lt;br /&gt;
*In any situation where cropping is an option&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Highest Energy&amp;quot; is selected on the ControlTL receiver, as shown on the [[HyperSync Setup#All ControlTL Radios – HyperSync Automation|All ControlTL Radios – HyperSync Automation]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can achieve similar results to [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync#Highest Energy|Highest Energy]] &#039;&#039;&#039;manually&#039;&#039;&#039; with a non-ControlTL compatible flash by following the directions for the [[HyperSync Setup#How to Configure the Receiving FlexTT5 P2 Port|FlexTT5 P2 Port]] and trying to eliminate clipping at &#039;&#039;&#039;lower&#039;&#039;&#039; HyperSync speeds without &amp;quot;clipping&amp;quot; visible at the bottom of your frame.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can achieve similar results to [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync#Highest Energy|Highest Energy]] HyperSync &#039;&#039;&#039;manually&#039;&#039;&#039; with a radio receiving on a [[Channels#Standard Channels|Standard Channel]] (meaning a ([[Plus II]], [[Plus III]], [[PlusX]], [[MultiMAX]], [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|FlexTT5 in Basic Trigger Mode]]), or internal PocketWizard receiver built in to your flash.) This is done by following the directions for the [[HyperSync Setup#How to Configure the ControlTL Transmitter - HyperSync Flash Duration For Standard Channels|How to Configure the ControlTL Transmitter - HyperSync Flash Duration For Standard Channels]] section, and trying to eliminate clipping at your &#039;&#039;&#039;lower&#039;&#039;&#039; HyperSync speeds without &amp;quot;clipping&amp;quot; visible at the bottom of your frame.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Using Speedlites or the Einstein E-640 for HyperSync  with HyperSync is most effective at full power with these flashes because of their IGBT design. HSS/Auto-FP is suggested for users shooting above X-sync with Speedlites. For more information, consult the flash manufacturer&#039;s documentation on flash duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Read the [[HyperSync Setup]] page for more detailed information on how to adjust HyperSync.&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Factors to consider ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many factors that may impact HyperSync performance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Flash Duration ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Flash duration is a critical factor in HyperSync performance. The flash duration is the length of time from when your flashtube is first energized to when it is no longer emitting energy. Longer flash durations are better. You may want to compare t.5 times from flash manufacturers to see how long or short your flash is compared to others. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;gallery perrow=2 widths=300px caption=&amp;quot;Difference Flash Duration Makes With Otherwise Matching Equipment&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:IMG_0282.JPG|Ranger RX (S Head) at full power, 5D Mark II 1/8000th f/22&lt;br /&gt;
File:5DIIRangerRXA RC +3.JPG|Ranger RX (A Head) at full power, 5D Mark II 1/8000th f/22 &lt;br /&gt;
File:Ranger RX 7.5 Power Flash Duration.JPG|Ranger RX S Head Flash Duration Shape t.5=1/1150&lt;br /&gt;
File:Ranger_RX_A-head_7.5_Power_Flash_Duration.JPG|Ranger RX A Head Flash Duration Shape t.5=1/2300 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Power Level ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Flash duration is a critical factor in HyperSync performance. The flash duration is the length of time from when your flashtube is first energized to when it is no longer emitting energy. Longer flash durations are better. You may want to compare t.5 times from flash manufacturers to see how long or short your flash is compared to others. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;gallery perrow=2 widths=300px caption=&amp;quot;Difference Power Level has on Flash Duration&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:IMG_0282.JPG|Ranger RX (S Head) at full power, 5D Mark II 1/8000th f/22&lt;br /&gt;
File:5DIIRangerRXS RC -3.JPG|Ranger RX (S Head) at lowest power, 5D Mark II 1/8000th f/22&lt;br /&gt;
File:Ranger RX 7.5 Power Flash Duration.JPG|Ranger RX S Head Flash Duration Shape - Highest Power&lt;br /&gt;
File:Ranger_RX_S-Head_1.5_Power_Flash_Duration.JPG|Ranger RX S Head Flash Duration Shape - Lowest Power&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Use with IGBT-controlled strobes ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*A Speedlight, Einstein E640, or other IGBT-controlled flash will need to be used at full power with HyperSync. Power levels less than full will result in clipping at the top and bottom due to the way IGBT-controlled flashes adjust flash duration for power control. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To read more about how IGBT-controlled flashes differ from other types of flashes, see the [[IGBT-controlled flashes vs. Voltage-controlled flashes]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;gallery perrow=2 widths=300px caption=&amp;quot;IGBT-controlled flash at 1/1 power and 1/2 power&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:5DMarkIIEinsteinFullPower.JPG|Einstein E640 at full power, 5D Mark II 1/8000th f/11&lt;br /&gt;
File:5D_Mark_II_Einstein-1Stops.JPG|Einstein E640 (with PowerMC2) -1 stop from full, 5D Mark II 1/8000th f/11&lt;br /&gt;
File:Einstein_full_timing.JPG|Einstein E640 Flash Duration Shape t.5=1/2000th&lt;br /&gt;
File:Einstein_FlashDuration_-1.JPG|Einstein E640 Flash Duration Shape t.5=1/4000th (estimated)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Camera Choice ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Cameras with larger and slower shutters can produce more noticeable gradation. Cameras with faster moving shutters and smaller sensors can improve HyperSync success by minimizing gradation. Faster or slower moving shutters are not the same as your camera&#039;s shutter speed setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;gallery perrow=2 widths=300px caption=&amp;quot;Camera Choice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:IMG_0282.JPG|Ranger RX (S Head) at full power, 5D Mark II 1/8000th f/22 &#039;&#039;&#039;(Slower Shutter)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
File:1DMarkIVRangerRXS RC +3.JPG|Ranger RX (S Head) at full power, 1D Mark IV 1/8000th f/22 &#039;&#039;&#039;(Faster Shutter)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Some cameras allow enough time for HyperSync to fire before the camera moves its first shutter. Some do not. Different combinations yield different results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;gallery perrow=2 widths=300px caption=&amp;quot;Communication Time Limitation&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:IMG_0282.JPG|Ranger RX (S Head) at full power, Canon 5D Mark II 1/8000th f/22 &#039;&#039;&#039;(More Communication Time)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
File:D3RangerRXS_RC_+3.JPG|Ranger RX (S Head) at full power, Nikon D3 1/8000th f/22 (HyperSync Only Enabled)&#039;&#039;&#039; (Less Communication Time)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Rear_Curtain_Sync&amp;diff=1584</id>
		<title>Rear Curtain Sync</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Rear_Curtain_Sync&amp;diff=1584"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
==Canon==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We’ve added Optimized Rear Curtain Sync capabilities with the ability for you to set the shutter speed at which rear curtain sync is engaged. Optimized Rear Curtain Sync requires a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 as the transmitter, but you can use any PocketWizard as a receiver. You will need to plug your radio into the [[PocketWizard Utility]] to activate this feature. The default setting is set to &amp;quot;off&amp;quot;. You can adjust the setting to choose where Rear Curtain Sync will engage in the [[PocketWizard Utility]] under the [[Flash Tab#Rear Curtain Sync Begins At: (Canon Only)|Flash Tab]]. You will also need to check the &amp;quot;Optimized Rear Curtain Sync/Manual Shutter Speeds&amp;quot; box directly below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We found in testing that the Canon system rear curtain sync timing is actually not at the precise end of the shutter opening, but actually slightly before (Fig 1). We have been able to improve on this timing to put the flash at the very end of the exposure (Fig 2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:735rcsynccanonweb2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:735rcsynpwweb2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fig 1: Rear Curtain Sync using&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Canon’s technology. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Note: streak below golf ball.&lt;br /&gt;
*Camera: 7D&lt;br /&gt;
*Shutter Speed: 1/10th&lt;br /&gt;
*Aperture: f/5.6&lt;br /&gt;
*Lens: EF 50mm f/2.5 Macro&lt;br /&gt;
|Fig 2: Rear Curtain Sync using&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;PocketWizard’s technology.&lt;br /&gt;
*Camera: 7D&lt;br /&gt;
*Shutter Speed: 1/10th&lt;br /&gt;
*Aperture: f/5.6&lt;br /&gt;
*Lens: EF 50mm f/2.5 Macro&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You do not need to set anything on your flashes including Canon’s own Second-Curtain Sync button.  Toggling the setting on the flash will not change the setting in the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Nikon==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rear Curtain Sync in the Nikon system is simply controlled by the on-camera setting. When using a ControlTL capable radio, this setting is respected for enabling and disabling Rear Curtain Sync. With a Nikon camera, the Rear Curtain Sync setting can be left enabled at any shutter speed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, the Rear Curtain Sync functionality actually begins at 1/125th, and is used at all slower shutter speeds when enabled. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer to your camera&#039;s manual for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===8 Second Limit===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 radio, the longest supported Rear Curtain Sync shutter speed is 8 seconds. Rear Curtain Sync exposures longer than this will not sync properly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rear Curtain Sync and Bulb===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rear Curtain Sync and Bulb mode cannot be used together, because Bulb exposures are terminated manually by the photographer. With rear curtain sync, the radio sends a signal to the flash to fire just before the shutter closes. In Bulb mode, the exposure timing is infinitely variable, and the radios do not receive commands indicating that an exposure is about to end.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Raven&amp;diff=1583</id>
		<title>Raven</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Raven&amp;diff=1583"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:raven.png|right|400px|MultiMAX]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Raven by Fusion TLC (our partner company) is a revolutionary new universal lighting and camera trigger that uses the new PocketWizard E Release protocol. Using a Raven on your camera, the unit will pair perfectly with your PocketWizard radios. You can also add new products to your system as the Raven is also designed to work with Paul C Buff, Profoto, and Godox flashes. This groundbreaking new product will let you trigger 2 different systems at the same time, while keeping all of the features that are available for both brands. The Raven takes the features of the FlexTT5 and AC3, plus special timing functions from our legendary flagship MultiMAX radios, then adds some groundbreaking new features, and combines them all into one easy to use unit.  &#039;&#039;&#039;[https://pocketwizard.com/products-radios-raven/ Learn more]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Compatibility==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Raven is compatible with several different manufacturers. This wiki page will primarily include information about using the Raven with PocketWizard radios. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===PocketWizard===&lt;br /&gt;
The Raven can communicate with any PocketWizard that uses the E Release technology. It is compatible with the PlusXe, Plus IIIe, Plus IVe, FlexTT5, FlexTT6, and PowerMC2 radios. If your PocketWizard radios have not been upgraded to the E Release, you can learn more about it [[PocketWizard E Release|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other Manufacturers=== &lt;br /&gt;
The Raven can trigger 2 different brands of remotes at the same time. It is currently compatible with PocketWizard, Paul C Buff, Profoto, and Godox. Other manufacturers are in the works. For more detailed compatibility with other brands, please visit the [https://fusiontlc.com/pages/camera-and-flash-compatibilities Fusion TLC compatibility] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Basic Setup with PocketWizard Radios==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before using a PocketWizard radio with your Raven, there are a few things to set up. &lt;br /&gt;
#Ensure that both your PocketWizard radios and the Raven have the most updated firmware version. &lt;br /&gt;
#Verify that the Raven is set to trigger a PocketWizard radio. From the Raven&#039;s main screen (Zone Selection Display), swipe from top down.&lt;br /&gt;
#Rotate the dial to the Brand icon and tap on it.&lt;br /&gt;
#Scroll through the first column until you see PocketWizard then press the check mark.&lt;br /&gt;
#Press the Back/home button to return to the main screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Basic Manual Flash Setup===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Connect a PocketWizard to a remote flash via the sync port. (if you are using a Plus IVe, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6, slide the speedlight into the hot shoe)&lt;br /&gt;
#Turn on the flash then turn on the PocketWizard. Set the flash to manual.&lt;br /&gt;
#Slide the Raven into your camera&#039;s hot shoe. Turn on the Raven, then the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
#Ensure the Zone you are using on the remote PocketWizard is set to manual on the Raven. &lt;br /&gt;
#Press the test button on the Raven to trigger the remote flash.&lt;br /&gt;
#Take photos normally. Adjust the flash power on the flashes themselves as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details, please see the [https://fusiontlc.com/pages/setting-up-pocketwizard-radios-to-the-raven-for-lighting Fusion TLC Setting up PocketWizard radios] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Basic TTL Flash Setup===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Connect a PocketWizard FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 to a remote speedlight. (note: check the [[Canon]] or [[Nikon]] Wiki pages for compatibility if needed)&lt;br /&gt;
#Turn on the flash and set it to TTL. Do not use remote or slave. Turn on the PocketWizard. You should see a confirmation pop after a couple seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
#Slide the Raven into your camera&#039;s hot shoe. Turn on the Raven, then the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
#Ensure the Zone you are using on the remote PocketWizard is set to TTL on the Raven.&lt;br /&gt;
#Press the test button on the Raven to trigger the remote flash.&lt;br /&gt;
#Take photos normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details, please see the [https://fusiontlc.com/pages/setting-up-pocketwizard-radios-to-the-raven-for-lighting Fusion TLC Setting up PocketWizard radios] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Basic Remote Camera Triggering===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Connect a PocketWizard Plus IIIe or Plus IVe to the remote camera cable and connect the other end of the cable to your camera&#039;s remote port.&lt;br /&gt;
#Turn on the PocketWizard then turn on the remote camera. Change the PocketWizard&#039;s setting to either LR or Rx LR.&lt;br /&gt;
#Slide the Raven into your camera&#039;s hot shoe. Turn on the Raven, then the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
#Swipe right to left on the Raven. This brings you to the camera triggering screen. Tap the Master icon.&lt;br /&gt;
#Tap on the Zone you want to use so it is highlighted.&lt;br /&gt;
#Tap on the PING icon, you should see a green circle around the Zone you chose.&lt;br /&gt;
#Take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details, please see the [https://fusiontlc.com/pages/setting-up-raven-remote-camera-triggering Fusion TLC Remote Camera Triggering] page.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=RF_Resources&amp;diff=1582</id>
		<title>RF Resources</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=RF_Resources&amp;diff=1582"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Looking for more technical information to enrich your understanding of radio frequency (RF)? Start with these PocketWizard resources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Helpful Links==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Long Range Performance]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:A practical guide to improving real-world radio range and reducing interference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Channels]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Details on Standard Channels, Quad-Zone Triggering Channels, and how frequencies are shared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Multiuser Environments]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Best practices for crowded events where many photographers are transmitting at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Learn Mode]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:How to teach channels in the field and verify communication between radios.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=PowerST4&amp;diff=1581</id>
		<title>PowerST4</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=PowerST4&amp;diff=1581"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Receiver with ControlTL for Elinchrom RX=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PWPOWERST4A_lbox.jpg|right|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The PowerST4 Receiver enables remote power control of Elinchrom RX flashes using PocketWizard ControlTL technology.  With a MiniTT1 Transmitter or FlexTT5 Transceiver on your camera and a PowerST4 plugged into your Elinchrom RX flash, you can now adjust the flash power settings [[PowerTracking#Basic Power Control|directly from the camera]]. Add the [[AC3 ZoneController]] and you can control three different zones of lights in 1/3-stop increments with up to a six-stop range.  Utilize PocketWizard’s unique features such as [[HyperSync]] and Optimized [[Rear Curtain Sync]] for maximum control of your lighting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using your PowerST4=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PWPOWERST4B lbox.jpg|right|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Connect the PowerST4 to your RX flash pack via the remote port, then power on the flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select Zone A, B, or C with the Zone Switch on your PowerST4. Default = A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Set up your PocketWizard transmitter and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Make sure all your radios are set to the same PocketWizard channel.&#039;&#039;&#039; See the Learn Mode and PocketWizard Utility sections for more information&lt;br /&gt;
on channels. Default = ControlTL 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Status LED blinks &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:green;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Green&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; every few seconds to indicate normal operation. It will blink &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Red&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; in sync with a trigger. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Momentarily pressing TEST/LEARN will test trigger the flash. See the Learn Mode and Reset sections for more information on those functions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The PowerST4 overrides settings you make directly on your flash. If you would like to change the beeper, modeling light, or optical slave mode on your flash, just set those features on your flash before you turn on your camera’s transmitter. You can also adjust these settings from your transmitter via the PocketWizard Utility. See that section for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like the flash to simply trigger at the output power you set, and not accept power changes from the radio, follow these steps: &#039;&#039;Make sure to allow a few seconds between each step!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Turn the flash on and change the power level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Then press TEST on the PowerST4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait a few seconds for 3 amber blinks from the PowerST4&#039;s LED.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To allow the PowerST4 to control the flash features again, turn the flash OFF and back ON.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; When receiving on Standard Channels, the PowerST4 will be unable to do any form of PowerTracking, or remote Manual Power Control. You must be using a ControlTL radio in ControlTL radio mode for the Elinchrom flash to be able to engage in any form of ControlTL feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[PowerST4 FAQ]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
Having trouble with your PowerST4? Check out our [[PowerST4 FAQ]] page!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[ControlTL]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:controltl.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
PocketWizard’s newest firmware platform taps into the camera’s digital communications to enable an entirely new level of remote flash capability through our proven radio system.   [[ControlTL]] allows remote TTL systems as well as [[PowerTracking#Basic Power Control|Manual Power Control]].  ControlTL firmware is configurable and upgradeable for “future-proof” continuous improvement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Manual Power Control =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:manual_power_control.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
Adjust the manual power settings of your remote Elinchrom flash directly from a [[AC3 ZoneController]], or master flash mounted on your on-camera [[MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5|MiniTT1 or FlexTT5]].  You can independently control the power output of up to three remote groups of lights (you can have as many lights in each group as you want) from full power down to the lowest setting through the user interface on the back of the master flash or with the dials of the AC3 ZoneController.   Now you can work with total control with your remote lights, without leaving your shooting position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[HyperSync]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Hypersync.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
Our patent pending HyperSync® technology allows photographers to achieve faster X-sync speeds with full power flash.  That extra speed can be used to freeze action or cut ambient light - both of which can produce results never possible before. HyperSync works automatically with the PowerST4.  All you need is a [[MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5|MiniTT1 or FlexTT5]] on camera to gain the benefits of HyperSync. While performance varies by the camera and flash equipment being used, HyperSync will get the maximum possible out of any configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[PowerTracking]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:powertracking.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
When working with certain manual flashes, you can change any of your settings on your camera and the system adjusts for those settings.  Change your camera&#039;s exposure compensation to adjust the flash output, or make adjustments in aperture or ISO and the system balances your flash for proper exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[PowerTracking#Basic Power Control|Basic Power Control]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a ControlTL transmitter like the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 then you can control your flash’s output level remotely. Add the AC3 ZoneController for even more control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read the PowerTracking section for more information on using the PowerST4 when no AC3 is present, or when using an AC3 in Auto Mode. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In AC3 Manual Mode, the AC3 Power Dial sets the flash power output as shown in the table below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style= border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=5|Elinchrom PowerST4 Manual Power Output Settings&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;AC3 Power Dial&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; in Manual&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;300RX&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;600RX&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;RangerRX/&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;2400RX&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +3&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |5.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |6.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |7.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |8.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2.7&lt;br /&gt;
|5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|6.1&lt;br /&gt;
|7.1&lt;br /&gt;
|8.1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2.3&lt;br /&gt;
|4.8&lt;br /&gt;
|5.8&lt;br /&gt;
|6.8&lt;br /&gt;
|7.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |4.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |6.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |6.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1.7&lt;br /&gt;
|4.1&lt;br /&gt;
|5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|6.1&lt;br /&gt;
|7.1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1.3&lt;br /&gt;
|3.8&lt;br /&gt;
|4.8&lt;br /&gt;
|5.8&lt;br /&gt;
|6.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |4.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |5.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |6.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +0.7&lt;br /&gt;
|3.1&lt;br /&gt;
|4.1&lt;br /&gt;
|5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|6.1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|2.8&lt;br /&gt;
|3.8&lt;br /&gt;
|4.8&lt;br /&gt;
|5.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; |0&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |2.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |4.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |5.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|2.1&lt;br /&gt;
|3.1&lt;br /&gt;
|4.1&lt;br /&gt;
|5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -0.7 &lt;br /&gt;
|1.8&lt;br /&gt;
|2.8&lt;br /&gt;
|3.8&lt;br /&gt;
|4.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -1&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |2.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |4.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -1.3&lt;br /&gt;
|1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|2.1&lt;br /&gt;
|3.1&lt;br /&gt;
|4.1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -1.7&lt;br /&gt;
|0.8&lt;br /&gt;
|1.8&lt;br /&gt;
|2.8&lt;br /&gt;
|3.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -2&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |0.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |2.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -2.3&lt;br /&gt;
|0.5&lt;br /&gt;
|1.5&lt;br /&gt;
|2.1 / 2.5*&lt;br /&gt;
|3.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -2.7&lt;br /&gt;
|0.5&lt;br /&gt;
|1.5&lt;br /&gt;
|1.8/ 2.5*&lt;br /&gt;
|3.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -3&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |0.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1.5 / 2.5*&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
|}  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers in the table are within +/- 0.1 stops.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[PocketWizard Utility]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pw_utility.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
Use the PocketWizard Utility software with the on-board USB port to program the PowerST4 to any PocketWizard [[Channels|channel]] and zone as well as many other custom settings.  [[ControlTL]] radios can be upgraded whenever updates and feature enhancements are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Compatibility:===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3|PowerST4 Series Compatiblity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Style&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Digital&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Ranger * &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|300RX&lt;br /&gt;
|1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|600RX&lt;br /&gt;
|2400RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;When using a Ranger RX or Digital RX series pack, make sure to set the flash head in use in the [[PocketWizard Utility]], under the [[Misc Tab]] for optimal [[HyperSync]] performance.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: The PowerST4 is &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; compatible with the Ranger RX Quadra. Use a Plus series radio, MultiMAX, or the P2 port of a FlexTT5 as a receiving radio for that pack.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Important Details=====&lt;br /&gt;
*In order to connect to Ranger RX series packs, the PowerST4 requires an Elinchrom female 5-pin to male 7-pin Ranger RX Adapter, (Elinchrom Part # EL 19374). The PowerST4 will connect directly to the 5-pin RX port of Style RX and Digital RX series packs/heads. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*For longer range performance, and for general use, we recommend the Ranger Remote Cable 8&#039; (Elinchrom Part # EL 11107), or other compatible Elinchrom extension cable. This will allow for raising the PowerST4 antenna above the pack&#039;s ground level position, or optimizing reception in other challenging environments like arena cat walks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Elinchrom has discontinued these cables and they are becoming increasingly difficult to find.  [http://michaelbass.blogspot.com/2007/09/sync-cords.html#ElinchromRXcables Michael Bass] offers a custom solution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=4|Elinchrom RX Cables &amp;amp; Part Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Elinchrom Part Number&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Length&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;For Use With&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|EL 19374&lt;br /&gt;
|Adapter&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Adapter &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|EL 11110&lt;br /&gt;
|0.66ft (7.9 inches) / 0.2m&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|EL 11106&lt;br /&gt;
|3.9ft / 1.2m&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Cable &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|EL 11107&lt;br /&gt;
|7.9ft / 2.4m&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|EL 11108&lt;br /&gt;
|15.8ft / 4.8m&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|EL 11109&lt;br /&gt;
|31.5ft / 9.6m&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|EL 11100&lt;br /&gt;
|3.9ft / 1.2m&lt;br /&gt;
|Style RX, Digital RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 5-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|EL 11101&lt;br /&gt;
|7.9ft / 2.4m&lt;br /&gt;
|Style RX, Digital RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 5-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|EL 11102&lt;br /&gt;
|15.8ft / 4.8m&lt;br /&gt;
|Style RX, Digital RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 5-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|EL 11103&lt;br /&gt;
|31.5ft / 9.6m&lt;br /&gt;
|Style RX, Digital RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 5-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|EL 11104&lt;br /&gt;
|63ft / 19.2m&lt;br /&gt;
|Style RX, Digital RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 5-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you own the Elinchrom EL 19342 Hand Remote Set then you can use its cable with your PowerST4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following Elinchrom cables are &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; compatible with the PowerST4:  EL 11085, EL 11086, EL 11087.  Those cables are for older analog Elinchrom Style S packs which are not compatible with the PowerST4. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to make your own extension cables, these links may help.  These are suggestions for connectors only.  You&#039;ll need to source your own wire.  The 5-pin connector on the PowerST4 seems to be a standard 5-pin 240 degree DIN (unfortunately not the more common 180 degree like used in MIDI cables). You might find connectors from places like SwitchCraft:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.switchcraft.com/productsummary.aspx?Parent=526 http://www.switchcraft.com/productsummary.aspx?Parent=526]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.switchcraft.com/productsummary.aspx?Parent=812 http://www.switchcraft.com/productsummary.aspx?Parent=812 (suggested locking connectors)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*5-pin Female might be = 13EL3FX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*5-pin Male might be = 12CL5MX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*7-pin Male connector is probably a DIN 270 degree = 15CL7MX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specifications:====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Frequency&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|340.00 - 354.00 US FCC/IC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;433.42 - 434.42 MHz - CE&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Channels&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|52 Channels over 26 Frequencies - US FCC/IC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 35 Channels over 5 Frequencies - CE&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Antenna&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|2.7&amp;quot; (6.9 cm) rubberized&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Mounting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Five-pin remote socket&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Zone Select Switch&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|A-B-C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Status Indicator&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|LED: Green, Amber, Red Status indications&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;USB&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|USB Compliant 2.0, Mini-B Connector, 5VDC regulated, 100mA, Pin 1 Positive, Pin 4 Ground&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Operating Temperature&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Above -15° C (5° F) and below 50° C (120° F)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Storage Temperature&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Above -30° C (22° F) and below 85° C (185° F)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Construction&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|high impact plastic, rubberized antenna, &#039;&#039;RoHS Compliant&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Power&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Receives power from attached flash&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Dimensions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|3.6&amp;quot; (9.2cm) long x 2.2&amp;quot; (5.5 cm) wide x 1&amp;quot; (2.5 cm) tall&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Weight&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|.77 ounces (21.83 grams)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Requirements&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Must be used in conjunction with a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on camera for power control capability.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;May be paired with any PocketWizard transmitter or transceiver for simple triggering.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=PocketWizard_Utility_FAQ&amp;diff=1580</id>
		<title>PocketWizard Utility FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=PocketWizard_Utility_FAQ&amp;diff=1580"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Do you have questions about the [[PocketWizard Utility]]? Check out these Frequently Asked Questions, compiled by [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If any of the methods below resolves your issue, &#039;&#039;&#039;please&#039;&#039;&#039; report which one worked for you [mailto:info@pocketwizard.com?subject=Utility%20Report here]!  Thank you!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I reset everything back to defaults?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your PocketWizard radios can be reset using the [[PocketWizard Utility]] or by doing a full manual reset, which is the recommended method. To reset via the PocketWizard Utility, click the Update tab then click on Factory Reset. Say Yes to reset the unit. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For full manual resets:&lt;br /&gt;
*Plus III or Plus IV: Hold in the test button as you turn the radio on. When all of the segments light up, you can release the test button. The radios should default to TxRx, ABCD, and either CH17 (for Legacy firmware) or CH01 (for E Release) firmware.&lt;br /&gt;
*MultiMAX: Hit *MENU B D C or hold in the C button as you turn it on. &lt;br /&gt;
*MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6: Hold in the test button as you turn it on, for about 15 seconds, until you see 4 green blinks. You will see 1 blink, pause, 2 blinks, longer pause, then the last 4 blinks.&lt;br /&gt;
*PowerST4 or PowerMC2: these can only be reset via the PocketWizard Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check out our [[Factory Reset]] page for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===If the PocketWizard Utility won&#039;t recognize your radios or can&#039;t update them, try these suggestions: ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you connect the PocketWizard to the PocketWizard Utility, you should see an image of the radio and it will show you the serial number, firmware version, loader version, and hardware version. If you are not seeing the radio in the PocketWizard Utility window or if you get an error message when updating, there are several ways to try to fix the issue. Here are some things you can try:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure you have the latest version of the Utility, available for download on our [[Getting Started]] page &lt;br /&gt;
* Try performing a &amp;quot;hard&amp;quot; [[Factory Reset]] or &amp;quot;Reset B&amp;quot; on your radio. This can sometimes be effective where clicking the Factory Reset button in the Utility is not&lt;br /&gt;
* Try a different USB cable. You may have a bad cable or you may have a cable that is only a power cable. You will need a mini B to USB data cable to make changes with the PocketWizard Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are using a USB hub, like in your monitor, try a USB port directly on the computer &lt;br /&gt;
* If you are using a USB port directly on the computer, try going through a hub&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are using a Port Expander, try connecting directly to the computer&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are using a USB 3.0 port, try a USB2.0 port, or vice versa&lt;br /&gt;
* Try closing the Utility program, connecting the radio, then reopen the Utility program&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure your computer&#039;s motherboard and operating system drivers are up to date&lt;br /&gt;
* If the radio has batteries in it, try connecting without batteries installed or with brand new batteries&lt;br /&gt;
* If the radio switch is in the OFF position when connecting it to USB, try it in the ON position, or vice versa&lt;br /&gt;
* Try connecting your radio to the computer&#039;s USB port before running the PocketWizard Utility&lt;br /&gt;
* Be patient. When disconnecting one radio, wait 15 seconds (or more!) before connecting another one, and then wait up to 2 minutes to see if it eventually connects (it can take a Windows computer up to 2 minutes to recognize a radio for the first time)&lt;br /&gt;
* Wait for any messages in the bottom of the Utility to disappear before connecting another radio, especially &amp;quot;Lost communication...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* Temporarily disable any software that is specifically looking for other USB devices, like a voice recorder, camcorder, tablet, gaming controllers, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
* Temporarily disable any anti-virus or anti-malware software that may be trying to &amp;quot;manage&amp;quot; your USB ports for you&lt;br /&gt;
* Disconnect any and all other USB devices that may be interfering&lt;br /&gt;
* Try using a different user account&lt;br /&gt;
* Try using your computer’s Safe Mode &lt;br /&gt;
* Try another computer&lt;br /&gt;
* If you’re still having trouble, contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] for help&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I&#039;m getting this error: &amp;quot;Archive Extraction Error&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Error extracting files from archive. #17&amp;quot;===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several workarounds for this issue.  Please try one of the methods below and &#039;&#039;&#039;please&#039;&#039;&#039; report which one worked for you [mailto:info@pocketwizard.com?subject=Utility%20Report here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Try the steps in the &amp;quot;Why won’t the Utility recognize or update my radios?&amp;quot; section above.  Sometimes this issue is USB related.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Try a complete uninstall and re-install of the Utility====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mac OS X&lt;br /&gt;
:#In the Finder sidebar, click Applications then drag &amp;quot;PocketWizard Utility&amp;quot; from the Applications folder to the Trash (located at the end of the Dock), then choose Finder &amp;gt; Empty Trash.  Do this for all PocketWizard applications and downloads&lt;br /&gt;
:#Install the PocketWizard Utility from here: [[Getting Started]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Windows&lt;br /&gt;
:#Start | Programs | PocketWizard Utility | Uninstall&lt;br /&gt;
:#Go to C:\Users\&amp;lt;YOUR USERNAME&amp;gt;\AppData\Roaming\ and delete everything PocketWizard&lt;br /&gt;
:#Install the PocketWizard Utility from here: [[Getting Started]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Try drag and drop of individual firmware files====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contact PocketWizard Technical Support via [mailto:info@pocketwizard.com?subject=Firmware%20file%20request email] to obtain the appropriate firmware files for your devices. You will need to attach a photo of each unit&#039;s serial number to obtain the correct firmware files. Technical support will determine if they can send you the appropriate files. &lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;WARNING&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Attempting to install the wrong firmware file into your radio could render it unusable/bricked! Only use the drag and drop method after you have discussed it with tech support and they have verified your exact radio. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Save the appropriate files to your computer. Don&#039;t open, expand, extract, or perform any other operations with the files - just save them to your desktop or a folder where you can find them&lt;br /&gt;
#Connect your radio to the computer and run the Utility&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the correct file onto the Utility with the radio connected, then drop it onto the picture of the radio. Don&#039;t open, expand, extract, or perform any other operations with the file - just drag and drop it&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Try using the older version of the Utility====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will not be able to use a Panasonic FlexTT5 or a Plus IV radio with Utility versions 1.54 through 1.63, nor will you have the latest security certificates or bug fixes available in 1.70.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Windows&lt;br /&gt;
:#Start | Programs | PocketWizard Utility | Uninstall&lt;br /&gt;
:#Go to C:\Users\&amp;lt;YOUR USERNAME&amp;gt;\AppData\Roaming\ and delete everything PocketWizard&lt;br /&gt;
:#Download version 1.70 from [https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Setup%201.70.exe here] and install it. Older 1.63 and 1.58 Windows installers are no longer hosted on the PocketWizard Utility server. If you need a legacy Windows build, please [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ contact PocketWizard support].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mac OS X&lt;br /&gt;
:#In the Finder sidebar, click Applications then drag &amp;quot;PocketWizard Utility&amp;quot; from the Applications folder to the Trash (located at the end of the Dock), then choose Finder &amp;gt; Empty Trash.  Do this for all PocketWizard applications and downloads&lt;br /&gt;
:#For Mac OS X version 10.6 (Snow Leopard) through 10.12 (Sierra), the older 1.63 installer is no longer hosted on the PocketWizard Utility server. If you need a legacy Mac build, please [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ contact PocketWizard support].&lt;br /&gt;
:#For Mac OS X version 10.13 (High Sierra) through 10.14 (Mojave), download version 1.70 from [https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Installer%201.70.dmg here]&lt;br /&gt;
:#For PowerPC Mac (older Macs - 2006 or earlier) or Mac OS X version 10.5 (Leopard) and earlier, the legacy 1.54 installer is no longer hosted on the PocketWizard Utility server. Please [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ contact PocketWizard support] if you need help with older systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Try another computer====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes this issue is simply not correctable any other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can I leave my radio connected to the USB port to test changes quickly?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No, you should disconnect the radio and power cycle it (if it was turned on) after any changes. Being connected to the PocketWizard Utility his will affect sync timing and give you inaccurate results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why won’t the Utility let me download the latest firmware version?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-Make sure you’re running the latest version of the [[PocketWizard Utility]], which is available for download on our [[Getting Started]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-Are you looking for [[Beta Firmware]]? Make sure you&#039;ve enabled that in the PocketWizard Utility. Follow the steps [[Beta Firmware|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-Look in Device Inventory and find the radio. Delete it from the inventory, then try to update the unit again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-The Utility uses a standard protocol to download firmware files. You can test HTTPS by entering the following URL into your browser:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: [https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/ https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If the link above opens a new tab or window with an indexed list of files, then your computer has access to our servers. Close that tab or window; it just tests if your computer has general access to our servers, but this tab or window is not used by the Utility.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you get the list of files, but the Utility still will not download firmware files, then check any firewall, anti-malware or anti-virus software you may be running.  Temporarily disable it to test the PocketWizard Utility behavior, but re-enable the firewall after testing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you do not see the list of files, then something is blocking your computer&#039;s access to the servers. Try this:&lt;br /&gt;
**Check your internet connection and verify it is working&lt;br /&gt;
**Check any firewall, anti-malware or anti-virus software you may be running.  Temporarily disable it test with the PocketWizard Utility behavior&lt;br /&gt;
**Check with your network administrator to see if it is being blocked on your network&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-If you’re still having trouble, contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] for help.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is the Utility compatible with my operating system?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The latest version of the [[PocketWizard Utility]] works well with all recent versions of Windows (7, 8.1, 10) and the latest Mac OS, Catalina (10.15.3). In the Read Me file, Windows 8.1 and 10 are not listed as compatible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why are all the fields in the Utility screen grayed-out?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Utility is trying to contact our servers and can&#039;t.  Start by opening a new browser window and entering [https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/ https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/]. If you are presented with an index list of files, that’s good – it means the [[PocketWizard Utility|Utility]] can access the necessary servers. If you are not presented with a list of files, check your firewall and security settings to be sure the [[PocketWizard Utility|Utility]] has been allowed the necessary permissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you still have trouble, contact [http://www.pocketwizard.com/contact/inquiry/ PocketWizard tech support].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where are all the options for advanced settings?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the check-box in the bottom-left corner of the [[PocketWizard Utility|Utility]] window (next to a picture of a small blue gear) to enable Advanced Mode and reveal additional settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is the latest firmware version for my radio? Where can I find release notes?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can find the latest firmware versions for your radios and read release notes on our [[Getting Started]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What do all of these Utility selections mean, anyway?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [[PocketWizard Utility|Utility]] can be used to optimize ControlTL radios for a particular desired performance. Most photographers will be able to use radios in their default settings. To read more about each Utility setting, visit our [[PocketWizard Utility]] wiki page.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Peanut2&amp;diff=1579</id>
		<title>Peanut2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Peanut2&amp;diff=1579"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:4pinACC.jpg|200px|thumb|right|&#039;&#039;&#039;4-pin ACC Port&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;FCC and CE MultiMAXes with this type of ACC port can be powered via the PW-AC-USB power supply.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6pinACC.jpg|200px|thumb|right|&#039;&#039;&#039;6-pin ACC Port&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;FCC MultiMAXes with this type of ACC port can be powered via the PW-AC-MX power supply.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:fccplus2.jpg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[File:arrow.png]] [[File:arrow.png]]&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;works with&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:pw-ac-2.jpg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;FCC Plus II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/cable_accessory/accessories/pw-ac-2/ PW-AC-2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:fccplus2.jpg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[File:arrow.png]] [[File:arrow.png]]&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;works with&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:pw-ac-2.jpg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;FCC Plus II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/cable_accessory/accessories/pw-ac-2/ PW-AC-2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==FCC Radios==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===FCC Plus II===&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:fccplus2.jpg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[File:arrow.png]] [[File:arrow.png]]&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;works with&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:pw-ac-2.jpg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;FCC Plus II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/cable_accessory/accessories/pw-ac-2/ PW-AC-2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===FCC MultiMAX with 4-pin ACC Port===&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:fccmm4pin.jpg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[File:arrow.png]] [[File:arrow.png]]&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;works with&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:pw-ac-usb.jpg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;FCC MultiMAX with 4-pin ACC Port&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/cable_accessory/accessories/pw-ac-mx/ PW-AC-MX]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===FCC MultiMAX with 6-pin ACC Port===&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:fccmm6pin.jpg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[File:arrow.png]] [[File:arrow.png]]&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;works with&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:pw-ac-mx.jpg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;FCC MultiMAX with 6-pin ACC Port&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/cable_accessory/accessories/pw-ac-mx/ PW-AC-MX]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===FCC MultiMAX with no ACC Port===&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:oldfccmmnoacc.jpg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[File:arrow.png]] [[File:arrow.png]]&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;works with&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:pw-ac-2.jpg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;FCC MultiMAX with no ACC Port&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/cable_accessory/accessories/pw-ac-2/ PW-AC-2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CE Radios==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===CE MultiMAX with 4-pin ACC Port===&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:cemm4pin.jpg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[File:arrow.png]] [[File:arrow.png]]&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;works with&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:pw-ac-usb.jpg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;CE MultiMAX with 4-pin ACC Port&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[https://pocketwizard.com/products/cable_accessory/accessories/pw-ac-usb/ PW-AC-USB]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===CE Plus II===&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:ceplus2.jpg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[File:arrow.png]] [[File:arrow.png]]&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;works with&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:noacadapter.jpg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;CE Plus II&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Cannot be powered externally.&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Cannot be powered externally.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===CE MultiMAX with no ACC Port===&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:cemmnoacc.jpg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[File:arrow.png]] [[File:arrow.png]]&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;works with&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:noacadapter.jpg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;CE MultiMAX with no ACC Port&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Cannot be powered externally.&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Cannot be powered externally.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===CE MultiMAX with 6-pin ACC Port===&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:cemm6pin.jpg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[File:arrow.png]] [[File:arrow.png]]&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;works with&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:noacadapter.jpg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;CE MultiMAX with 6-pin ACC Port&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Cannot be powered externally.&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Cannot be powered externally.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Panasonic&amp;diff=1578</id>
		<title>Panasonic</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Panasonic&amp;diff=1578"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;color:black; Background-color:#ffffcc;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; This page is currently under construction and information is being added often. If you cannot find the information you are looking for, please contact our technical support team [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ here].&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PanSon Flex 101.jpg|right|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Read Me==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Congratulations on your purchase of the PocketWizard FlexTT5® Wireless Photo Control System for Panasonic! You can use the FlexTT5 Transceiver to control single or multiple off-camera electronic or intelligent TTL flashes. The PocketWizard ControlTL® System takes the complex TTL data being sent through the camera’s hot shoe and digitally interprets and transmits it as a reliable radio signal. You can now place TTL or manual flashes anywhere to illuminate the scene: Around corners, out-of-sight and in bright sunlight. The FlexTT5 is compatible with any PocketWizard radio for triggering a manual flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====PocketWizard Utility====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your new PocketWizard radio runs on very sophisticated software we call ControlTL™ which can be configured to your specific needs using the PocketWizard Utility. You can download the PocketWizard Utility on our [[Getting Started]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Product Registration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ControlTL software is designed to be upgradeable and will be upgraded from time to time. Please register your product online to be notified when updates are available. Visit our [https://pocketwizard.com/registration/ Registration page].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Getting Started==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=center| caption=The PocketWizard FlexTT5 for Panasonic&lt;br /&gt;
| image=FlexTT5-bluelines.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width = 600 | height=500 | width= 600 | image-left=10 | image-top=20&lt;br /&gt;
| annotations =&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|32|45|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;USB Connector &amp;lt;i&amp;gt;(behind antenna)&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=11}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|32|97|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Adjustable antenna&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=11}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|32|188|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Zone Selector&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=11}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|32|220|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Configuration/Channel 1&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=10}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|32|230|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Configuration/Channel 2&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=10}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|32|240|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Power Off&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=10}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|32|292|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;TEST Button&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=11}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|32|369|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Remote studio or other&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=11}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|32|384|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;flash triggering port&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=11}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|32|420|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Remote Camera Triggering Port&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=11}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|32|457|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Status LED]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=11}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|507|43|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Lanyard Loop&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=11}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|477|97|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Batteries|Battery Compartment]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=11}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|507|112|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;(2AA [IEC:LR6])&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=11}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|520|167|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;1/4-20 mount&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=11}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|528|182|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;(on bottom)&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=11}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|524|235|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Panasonic&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=11}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|514|250|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Hot Shoe with&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=11}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|515|265|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Pass Through&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=11}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|520|368|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Locking Ring&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=11}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Annotation|505|383|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;(on bottom foot)&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;|font-size=11}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Power On Sequence&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure all of your FlexTT5s have been updated to the current firmware and that your Channels are matched. Be sure to select your camera model in the Utility for your transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect a FlexTT5 to your camera and FlexTT5s to your remote speedlights. &lt;br /&gt;
# Be sure to follow the proper power on sequence - first power on the FlexTT5s, then your camera and flashes. &lt;br /&gt;
# Take your first shot at 1/125 so the system can properly calibrate timing. (First shot will not be correctly exposed.)&lt;br /&gt;
# To adjust the flash power and settings, use the camera&#039;s menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#* Hit the Menu button, then select &amp;quot;Flash&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#* Ensure &amp;quot;Flash Mode&amp;quot; is set to &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot; (lightning bolt), &amp;quot;Wireless&amp;quot; is set to &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;Wireless FP&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Scroll to &amp;quot;Wireless Setup&amp;quot;. You can then adjust the remote flashes by using the Panasonic menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notes:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* All equipment should be turned OFF when connecting. &lt;br /&gt;
* Power on the FlexTT5 and then the camera and/or speedlight. &lt;br /&gt;
* If operation is erratic, check batteries first. We recommend using high-capacity rechargeable batteries in your Speedlight(s). &lt;br /&gt;
* Use the latest firmware for your camera and review all camera and flash manuals. &lt;br /&gt;
* You need a FlexTT5 for each remote Speedlight.&lt;br /&gt;
* For most basic functions, operation is identical Panasonic&#039;s wireless system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Camera Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Wireless====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Wireless mode you are able to control your remote Panasonic speedlights power levels by using the in-camera menus with three zones of power control. You have the option to shoot with either FP Mode On or FP Mode Off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;FP On:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; FP Mode allows you to shoot in TTL and Manual mode at shutter speeds above your cameras x-sync all the way up to 1/8000th with remote compatible speedlights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;FP Off:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; With FP Mode Off you can shoot in TTL and Manual mode at shutter speeds at or below your cameras x-sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Non-Wireless====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Non-Wireless mode, you can remotely trigger your speedlights above your cameras x-sync but all remote speedlights will be on one zone. In this mode, you are also able to use rear curtain sync with speedlights and strobes on and off camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Power Control====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All power adjustments can be done in Wireless Setup located in the Flash Menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When setting your power level always make sure to press the SET/MENU button to make sure the power level is properly set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Compatibility==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Current Firmware&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current firmware for the FlexTT5 for Panasonic is version &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;1.132&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The FlexTT5 radios can be updated to this firmware version using the [[Getting Started|PocketWizard Utility]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Camera Compatibility&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently, the FlexTT5 for Panasonic is compatible with the Lumix GH4 and the Lumix GH5. We hope to add more cameras to the compatibility list with future firmware updates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Speedlight Compatibility&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following speedlights are compatible with the FlexTT5 for Panasonic:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DMW-FL360L, DMW-FL580L, Olympus FL-600R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Specifications==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Trigger Delay:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; 0 seconds – “faster than a wire” when using compatible Panasonic cameras.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Batteries:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 x AA (IEC:LR6) (30 hours)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Approximately 30 hours of camera awake time, can vary with camera and&lt;br /&gt;
Speedlight models.&lt;br /&gt;
* Low-temperature operation and used batteries will have reduced battery life.&lt;br /&gt;
Always use fresh batteries when working in the cold. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Operating Temperature:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Above -15º C (5º F) and below 50º C (120º F)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Storage Temperature (with batteries):&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Above -30º C (-22º F) and below 85º C (185º F)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Frequency==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|US FCC/IC&lt;br /&gt;
|340.00 - 354.00 MHz&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|CE&lt;br /&gt;
|433.42 - 434.42 MHz&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;IMPORTANT:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; US FCC/Canada frequency radios are NOT compatible with CE frequency radios&lt;br /&gt;
and vice versa. For more information on frequency, please visit our [http://www.PocketWizard.com/wheretobuy/frequency/ Frequency page].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Warranty==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your PocketWizard FlexTT5 for Panasonic is covered under a two-year limited manufacturer&#039;s warranty. For warranty details please contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard support].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Nikon_D800/D800E&amp;diff=1577</id>
		<title>Nikon D800/D800E</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Nikon_D800/D800E&amp;diff=1577"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Nikon D800/D800E and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NikonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==D800/D800E Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the D800/D800E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===D800 vs. D800E===&lt;br /&gt;
The D800E uses an optical filter with all anti-aliasing properties removed with the aim of producing the sharpest images possible. Nikon reports that, aside from the optical filter, all functions and features are the same as on the D800. Likewise, our extensive testing suggests that the D800 and D800E perform comparably with PocketWizard radios. In terms of HyperSync performance, they are identical - if you are using the D800, the PDFs for D800E HyperSync performance will apply to your camera. For more information on the difference between these camera models, refer to Nikon&#039;s D800/D800E product documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens-Specific Shutter Clipping===&lt;br /&gt;
When the D800 or D800E is equipped with certain fixed lenses and set to its narrowest aperture setting, shutter clipping may be captured at HSS speeds, particularly above 1/2000. Affected lenses include the Nikon AF Nikkor 50mm f/1.4D, Nikon AF Micro-Nikkor 60mm f/2.8D, and Nikon AF-S Nikkor 50mm f/1.8G.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The latest firmware for the D800 is available for download at [https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/en/index.html Nikon Download Center].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The latest firmware for the D800E is available for download at [https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/en/index.html Nikon Download Center].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==HyperSync Performance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the tables below to view the D800/D800E&#039;s HyperSync performance with a specific flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NikonHyperSyncSteps}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Einstein and PowerMC2===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!HyperSync Only Control&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=4|Einstein E640&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|HyperSync Only Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/f/fb/D800E_Einstein_HyperSyncOnlyEnabled_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/a/ab/D800E_Einstein_HyperSyncOnlyEnabled_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerMC2 PowerMC2 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|HyperSync Only Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/7/73/D800E_Einstein_HyperSyncOnlyDisabled_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/7/7f/D800E_Einstein_HyperSyncOnlyDisabled_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerMC2 PowerMC2 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Example images were captured using the Einstein&#039;s &amp;quot;Color&amp;quot; mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Elinchrom and PowerST4===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!HyperSync Only Control&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=4|Ranger RX S-Head&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|HyperSync Only Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/9/92/D800_RangerRX_SHead_HyperSyncOnlyEnabled_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/b/b3/D800_RangerRX_SHead_HyperSyncOnlyEnabled_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerST4 PowerST4 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|HyperSync Only Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/3/3a/D800_RangerRX_SHead_HyperSyncOnlyDisabled_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/5/52/D800_RangerRX_SHead_HyperSyncOnlyDisabled_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerST4 PowerST4 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=4|Ranger RX A-Head&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|HyperSync Only Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/4/4d/D800_RangerRX_AHead_HyperSyncOnlyEnabled_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/e/e5/D800E_RangerRX_AHead_HyperSyncOnlyEnabled_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerST4 PowerST4 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|HyperSync Only Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/d/dc/D800_RangerRX_AHead_HyperSyncOnlyDisabled_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/e/ec/D800_RangerRX_AHead_HyperSyncOnlyDisabled_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerST4 PowerST4 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===White Lightning and FlexTT5 with AC9 AlienBees Adapter===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!HyperSync Only Control&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=4|White Lightning X3200&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|HyperSync Only Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|Highest Energy PDF coming soon!&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/d/dc/D800_WhiteLightningX3200_HyperSyncOnlyEnabled_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_FlexTT5_and_AC9_AlienBees_Adapter FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|HyperSync Only Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|Highest Energy PDF coming soon!&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/0/00/D800_WhiteLightningX3200_HyperSyncOnlyDisabled_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_FlexTT5_and_AC9_AlienBees_Adapter FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Don&#039;t see your gear?}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NikonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Multiuser_Environments&amp;diff=1576</id>
		<title>Multiuser Environments</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Multiuser_Environments&amp;diff=1576"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page outlines the best practices when many photographers are simultaneously triggering remote cameras at large sporting or other events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We are very proud of our radios.  They provide rock-solid mission-critical performance in venues around the world.  Thanks to our broad frequency range, powerful Custom IDs, and proven digital RF signaling methods, our MultiMAX radios can handle several photographers at the same event while providing control and exclusivity like no other remote trigger system.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But they are not originally designed to handle over 100+ photographers capturing the same finish-line moment as happens at the largest sporting events.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We continue to improve operation for exclusivity (Custom IDs), simultaneous use (Patterns), and greater distances (Long Range Mode).   But too many photographers on the same frequency can still be a concern.  Please read this information to learn the best methods to increase your odds of getting that once-in-a-lifetime remote shot at the most crowded events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Custom IDs, myths and realities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Custom ID is a private digital code.  In crowded shooting environments, Custom IDs allow only you to trigger your remote flash or camera.   Other photographers cannot trigger your remotes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Custom ID is not a “private frequency.”  It is an exclusive code installed on top of an existing PocketWizard frequency.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Too many photographers triggering simultaneously on the same frequency can be a serious issue, even for Custom ID users.  Your remote might not trigger because it cannot “hear” its digital code through all the other digital codes being transmitted on that frequency.  How many is too many?  Hard to say, but the fewer the better in all situations!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The methods throughout this document can be used to improve operation in multiuser environments.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get a Custom ID on your MultiMAX II, MultiMAX, FlexTT5/6 or Plus III/IV In one of 3 ways:&lt;br /&gt;
*If you already own the radios, contact us at [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] for shipping and payment information.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you want to buy radios from your favorite dealer, they can drop ship the radios to us. Please contact us at [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] before ordering.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you live in the US or Canada, you can buy the radio and ID on our [https://shop.pocketwizard.com/ shop] and have it shipped directly to you. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Custom IDs are $95 USD per ID per radio - this price hasn&#039;t changed since 2008.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Check List==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a quick check list to get you started:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Upgrade your firmware on your radios to the most recent version&lt;br /&gt;
*Know your frequency&lt;br /&gt;
*Find the Sign-up Sheet&lt;br /&gt;
*Set a Pattern (MultiMAX users)&lt;br /&gt;
*Set a long contact time on your Receiver (MultiMAX users)&lt;br /&gt;
*Use Long Range Mode on your transmitters *and* receivers&lt;br /&gt;
*Press and *hold* TEST or your trigger button, don’t tap it&lt;br /&gt;
*Use ferrite chokes on long cable runs.&lt;br /&gt;
*Get the receiver’s antenna as high as you can&lt;br /&gt;
*Maintain line of sight whenever possible&lt;br /&gt;
*Dress, hang, drape, run or dangle cables away from antennas&lt;br /&gt;
*Consider hard-wiring&lt;br /&gt;
*For best results, do not put the receiving radio in the remote camera&#039;s hot shoe. For auto sensing transcievers (Plus III, Plus IV, FlexTT5/FlexTT6), this will engage Auto Relay Mode. See [[Relay Mode]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Special Custom ID notes===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Custom IDs can only be installed on FlexTT5, FlexTT6, Plus III, Plus IV, MultiMAX II, or original MultiMAX radios with USB ports. If you have an original MultiMAX (power and DC ports only) or a MultiMAX with an ACC port but no USB, please contact us at [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] to see if we can install Custom IDs on your radio. They are not available for any other PocketWizard radios including PlusX, Plus II, MiniTT1, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
*The MultiMAX has been retired: [http://www.pocketwizard.com/news_events/news/multimax_retirement/ MultiMAX Retirement Announcement]&lt;br /&gt;
*You can buy PocketWizard radios directly from PocketWizard (only in the USA or Canada) or from your local dealer or distributor.  If you purchase them from your local dealer, you need to then send them to LPA Design / PocketWizard.&lt;br /&gt;
*Dealers and distributors do not sell radios with Custom IDs already installed.   Many dealers will let you drop-ship your PocketWizard radios directly to LPA Design for a Custom ID service.&lt;br /&gt;
*All MultiMAX, FlexTT5, or Plus III/IV radios that you want to work together must have the same Custom ID installed. &lt;br /&gt;
*Custom IDs cannot be installed via the PocketWizard Utility.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Future firmware updates will not erase your Custom IDs. They are permanent. &lt;br /&gt;
*You can get more than one Custom ID on a radio.  Each additional ID is $95 per radio. &lt;br /&gt;
*Typically a Custom ID replaces Standard Channel 17.  All other channels remain untouched and can be used with other radios.&lt;br /&gt;
*LPA Design / PocketWizard maintains a database of Custom ID holders.  Only you can get your Custom ID on future radios.&lt;br /&gt;
*Custom IDs are exclusively installed at LPA Design / PocketWizard in Vermont, USA.&lt;br /&gt;
*Purchase Custom IDs here:  [https://pocketwizard.com/products/custom-id/ PocketWizard Shop]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Know your frequency==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More important than knowing your Custom ID is knowing what frequency it is using.   At any large event, the goal is to have as few photographers sharing a single frequency as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a &#039;&#039;&#039;USB-capable FCC MultiMAX&#039;&#039;&#039; with firmware version 7.50 or higher, you can move your Custom ID to different frequencies.  Even though the Custom ID appears on Channel 17, it will use the frequency you set in the radio.  Set the frequency under the Other Functions/Custom ID menu.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a &#039;&#039;&#039;non-USB FCC MultiMAX&#039;&#039;&#039;,&#039;&#039;&#039;Plus III&#039;&#039;&#039;,&#039;&#039;&#039;Plus IV&#039;&#039;&#039;, or &#039;&#039;&#039;FlexTT5&amp;quot;, your Custom ID is locked on a single frequency.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If your Custom ID is on Channels 17 - 32, the last digit of your Custom ID determines the frequency.  See the table below.   Even though your Custom ID may appear on Channel 17, it is likely using a different frequency to transmit.&lt;br /&gt;
* If your Custom ID is on Channel 1 - 16 then your frequency is 344.04 MHz, the same frequency used by all PocketWizard Classics, Plus, Plus II, and other radios on Standard Channels 1 - 16.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more on the [[Channels]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see your Custom ID, simply turn on your MultiMAX.  It should show as part of the power-up sequence.  You can also hold &amp;quot;A&amp;quot; on your MultiMAX as you power it on to display your Custom ID(s). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a Plus III/IV with a Custom ID, it will show &amp;quot;CC&amp;quot; before the Channel instead of &amp;quot;CH&amp;quot;. There should be a label inside the battery compartment with your ID information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a FlexTT5/FlexTT6 with a Custom ID, you will see a label under the antenna. Note: the frequency will not be reflected in the Utility. You will need to refer to the sticker or document the Channel elsewhere.&lt;br /&gt;
For all users, when the Custom ID is installed, we will return the units with a letter stating the Custom ID code and the frequency your radios will use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;Non-USB FCC MultiMAX&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;80pt&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;Last Digit of Custom ID&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;80pt&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;Frequency (MHz)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|0&lt;br /&gt;
|354&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|353.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|353&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|352.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|352&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|351.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|351&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|350.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|350&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|349.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|A&lt;br /&gt;
|349&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|B&lt;br /&gt;
|348.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|C&lt;br /&gt;
|348&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|D&lt;br /&gt;
|347.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|E&lt;br /&gt;
|347&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|F&lt;br /&gt;
|346.5&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some Custom IDs in use that do not follow this table.  If you are unsure, contact LPA Design for more information.  We will research your radio in our database and help you understand which frequency you are actually using.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;CE MultiMAX&#039;&#039;&#039; radios only have 1 frequency for all Custom ID use due to regulatory limitations.  USB CE MultiMAX radios can use Patterns to get more simultaneous users.  Non-USB CE MultiMAX radios do not have access to Patterns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Use a Sign-Up sheet==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Anyone at an event, or an event coordinator, can help make sure all photographers have the best experience by using a sign-up sheet.  Here is an example:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[media:Multiuser_Sign-Up_Sheet_Example.pdf]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The goal of the sign up sheet is to minimize the number of users per frequency.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Best Practices for All Radios==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Hold TEST, don’t tap it===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When triggering a remote camera in a crowded environment, you will get better results if you press and hold the TEST or trigger button on your transmitting radio.  Pressing and holding TEST will put hundreds more trigger packets into the air for your receivers to hear.  Tapping TEST, or pressing and releasing it rapidly, will put fewer trigger packets in the air.  The more trigger packets that are sent, the higher chance your remote receiver will hear one!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tips for MultiMAX, Plus III, and Plus IV Users==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Engage Long Range Mode===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MultiMAX firmware version 7.50 and later has a special feature called Long Range Mode. This is only available for USB MultiMAX radios, FCC or CE.  MultiMAX radios without USB ports cannot take advantage of Long Range Mode. Long Range Mode is also available on the MultiMAX II, Plus III, and Plus IV radios. Long Range Mode is designed primarily for remote camera triggering, if used with a remote flash, there will be a reduction in sync speeds available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Long Range Mode increases the usable distance, up to double, between two radios. This mode must be activated on all radios that are expected to work together. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====MultiMAX====&lt;br /&gt;
When it is activated on a transmitting MultiMAX, LT will be displayed.  When it is activated on a receiving MultiMAX, -LR- will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Long Range Mode is set under the Other Functions/Range Mode menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Long Range Mode can be used with Custom IDs and Patterns.  Use longer Contact Times and hold TEST when triggering instead of tapping.  This is the recommended configuration for triggering a remote camera at any large sporting event.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Plus III and Plus IV====&lt;br /&gt;
Long Range Mode is activated by pressing the power/mode button until LR is displayed on the LCD. A radio set to LR mode will automatically transmit or receive signals, depending on it&#039;s connections. If a remote radio is in the hot shoe of the camera, when the camera is triggered, the radio will automatically switch to Auto Relay mode and transmit a signal one Channel higher. Please see the [[Relay Mode]] page for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Don&#039;t use Repeater Mode===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeater Mode is a very handy function for extending range when you are the only user on your frequency.  When you are sharing a frequency with other photographers, it is not recommended.  Improperly deployed Repeater Mode radios can add extra trigger signals causing the same trigger overlapping problem that Patterns is used to correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Additional Tips for MultiMAX Users==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Set Longer Contact Times in your Receiver===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contact time controls how long a receiver holds the shutter button pressed on your remote camera after it receives a radio trigger.  It is always set on your receiving MultiMAX.  Setting it on your transmitter has no effect on remote cameras.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A longer contact time on your receiver helps RF performance in a crowded multiuser environment.  If your remote MultiMAX receives a single correct RF trigger packet over the air, it will trigger your camera for the duration of the contact time.  If another single RF trigger packet makes it through before the contact time finishes, it will continue holding the camera triggered.   It only takes a very few trigger packets to get a long motor drive burst which may yield more usable finish line results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE:  You want a remote finish line camera to trigger a lot of frames right at the end of the race.  Set your contact time to a reasonable burst length.  If your camera can do 6 FPS in high speed drive mode, consider setting your contact time to 1 second.  Any single RF trigger packet received will guarantee you get at least 6 images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contact time is set in a MultiMAX under the Basic Settings menu.   Adjust using the letter and arrow keys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Set a Pattern===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There can be multiple Custom IDs triggering on the same frequency at very large sporting events.  Your Custom ID will prevent someone else from triggering your camera, but it won’t prevent someone else from stepping on your trigger signal and potentially canceling out the triggers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MultiMAX firmware 7.51 or later has a feature called Patterns.  Patterns help when there are multiple photographers triggering on the same frequency.  When you press and hold TEST on your MultiMAX, repeated triggers are being sent at a steady pace.  If your triggers overlap with another photographers, neither of your remote cameras will fire.  Patterns help keep repeating triggers from overlapping and dramatically reduce the possibility of cancelling each other out on the same frequency.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Patterns are only helpful for remote camera triggering.  They are not helpful for remote flash triggering.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For &#039;&#039;&#039;USB FCC MultiMAX&#039;&#039;&#039; radios with Custom IDs, Patterns are set under the Other Functions/Custom ID menu.  This menu only appears if you have Custom IDs installed in your USB FCC MultiMAX with firmware 7.51 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For &#039;&#039;&#039;USB CE MultiMAX&#039;&#039;&#039; radios, with or without Custom IDs, Patterns are handled differently.  Channels 17 – 32 are all on the same frequency already, so Patterns are available without Custom IDs installed.  Select a Pattern under the Other Functions/Custom ID menu, and make sure to set a different channel or Custom ID from other CE photographers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Patterns are only available for USB MultiMAX radios, FCC or CE.  MultiMAX radios without USB ports, FlexTT5s, Plus IIIs, and Plus IVs cannot take advantage of Patterns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about Patterns in the [https://wp2.pocketwizard.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/03/733MM3_Eng_Man_LPF100v1.5_plus_Add_7.5v1.1_7.51RN_2.pdf MultiMAX FCC &amp;amp; CE Manual plus Addendums].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Patterns are also summarized in the MultiMAX FCC &amp;amp; CE Manual plus Addendums.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Radio Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MultiMAX and MultiMAX II===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look here for features and specifications:  [http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/transmitter_receiver/multimax/ MultiMAX on PocketWizard.com]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quick links to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://wp2.pocketwizard.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/03/733MM3_Eng_Man_LPF100v1.5_plus_Add_7.5v1.1_7.51RN_2.pdf MultiMAX Manual plus Addendums]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://wp2.pocketwizard.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/03/394MultiMAX_CE_Multi-Language_Quick_Guide_-_Firmware_7xx.pdf CE Multilingual Quick Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://pocketwizard.com/manuals/ PocketWizard Manuals and Quick Guides].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Plus III/IV===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Plus III]]/IV can be used at large events, and get Custom IDs installed, but it cannot use the new MultiMAX Patterns.   A USB MultiMAX with a Custom ID is the preferred solution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Sign-Up Sheet, Plus III/IVs must use the first column only: “No Custom ID and/or non-Pattern radios.”  Plus III/IV [[Channels]] use the same Standard Channel Numbers and Frequencies as MultiMAX and ControlTL radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Putting the receiving radio in the remote camera&#039;s hot shoe will engage Auto Relay Mode. See [[Relay Mode]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ControlTL radios: MiniTT1 and FlexTT5/FlexTT6===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ControlTL radios like the [[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5]] can be used for remote camera triggering, and offer a few more frequency choices, however there are some important considerations.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FlexTT5s can get Custom IDs installed but cannot use MultiMAX Patterns.  A USB MultiMAX with a Custom ID is the preferred solution. A MiniTT1 cannot get Custom IDs installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FCC ControlTL radios share some frequencies with the FCC MultiMAX.  CE ControlTL radios do not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Putting the receiving radio in the remote camera&#039;s hot shoe will engage Auto Relay Mode. See [[Relay Mode]] for details.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====IMPORTANT==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using FCC ControlTL radios on ControlTL Channels 5-14 puts a large amount of radio packets in the air that can negatively affect all MultiMAX users on those shared frequencies.  This is because a ControlTL radio transmits a lot of settings and information as it communicates with the camera, while a MultiMAX only transmits a trigger signal.  If you are using a ControlTL radio at a crowded event, set your ControlTL Transmit Channel to channels 1-4 or 15-20 which do not have shared frequencies with the MultiMAX.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remember that ControlTL radios transmit on two Channels, a Standard Channel and a ControlTL Channel.  Set your Standard Channel to a frequency that is not in use, or use Standard Channel 5 (344.04 MHz) which is outside the range of modern MultiMAX Custom ID users and the [[Plus II]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Sign-Up chart, ControlTL radios must use the first column only: “No Custom ID and/or non-Pattern radios.”   Note the overlapping frequencies, and try to use a non-overlapping channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the PocketWizard Utility, set the following features in your ControlTL radios:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On your receiving FlexTT5/FlexTT6, engage “Disable Shoe Communications” on the Misc Tab.  This will allow you to trigger more quickly when the radio is mounted in the shoe of your remote camera, and will generate less radio traffic by disabling Auto-Relay Mode.&lt;br /&gt;
*On your transmitting FlexTT5/FlexTT6, consider changing the settings below.  This will generate less radio traffic on your frequency, benefitting other users:&lt;br /&gt;
**[[Flash Tab]] / Speedlight control – set to “No Change (Trigger Only)”&lt;br /&gt;
**Flash Tab / Remote Studio Controls – set both to “No Change On Wakeup”&lt;br /&gt;
**[[PowerTracking Tab]] / PowerTracking control – set to “No Change (Trigger Only)”&lt;br /&gt;
**[[Modeling Tab]] / Uncheck “Modeling Light Control”&lt;br /&gt;
**[[Sleep Tab]] / Uncheck “Remote TTL Flash Sleep Mode”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Hardwire==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Consider hardwiring your remote camera.  The more hardwire triggers in use, the greater the reliability for all photographers at a venue, whether you are using radios or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your low-voltage, low-current camera motor drive can only push so many electrons around, so give it the best conditions to do so:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Avoid add-a-taps.  These zip cord connectors are convenient, but a crimping/piercing connection can often be more fragile than other solutions like miniphone connectors.  A “stale” crimp that has been spooled up is a recipe for failure – it can be physically weakened when rolled/unrolled, and unseen corrosion can cause poor connectivity.   &lt;br /&gt;
*Soldered wires are usually better than connectors.  If you have the ability to solder wires directly together instead of using snap-together connectivity, like miniphone connections or add-a-taps, you should consider it.  Every “adapter” or snap-together connection represents another potential failure point.&lt;br /&gt;
*Use ferrite chokes.  When lots of unshielded cabling like zip line is used, it can act as a big antenna for EMI.  Even if you aren’t using a radio, EMI can cause you to miss triggers.  Your low-voltage motor drive circuit might not be able to tell if that was your switch closing on the line, or just random electrical noise from the “Swiss timing” box.  Place ferrite chokes near both ends of your hardwire run.  2 or 3, clamped 30cm or so apart, is usually enough.&lt;br /&gt;
*Run your hardwire as exclusively as possible.  The more wires piled on top of each other, the worse EMI can be.  This is especially true if your hardwire is running in the same catwalk/conduit/trough as power, AV, precision timing, scoring, or other cords and cables.  If you are limited and must share space, definitely use ferrite chokes as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
*Polarity matters for multiple cameras.  If you have more than one camera on the same hardwire, make extra sure to check that you have used the same polarity for each connection.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Keep the run as short as possible.  Avoid extra piles or loops/spools of cable as part of your setup.  Spooled or looped cable gathers and amplifies EMI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have any hardwire questions, feel free to ask!  Even though we are a radio company, we’ve learned a thing or two about hardwiring over the years.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==More coming soon!==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other topics will be posted as they are ready, like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Buddying up - multiple receivers on the same channel/Custom ID and/or multiple cameras with one receiver&lt;br /&gt;
*“Slaving” one camera to another - a remote camera can trigger from the shoe pulse of the camera in your hands, but is it wise?  (probably not!)&lt;br /&gt;
* Understanding Confirmation&lt;br /&gt;
*And more!&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=MultiMAX&amp;diff=1575</id>
		<title>MultiMAX</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=MultiMAX&amp;diff=1575"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:MultiMAX.jpg|right|400px|MultiMAX]]More MultiMAX information coming soon!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look here for features and specifications:  [http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/transmitter_receiver/multimax/ MultiMAX on PocketWizard.com]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quick links to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://wp2.pocketwizard.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/03/733MM3_Eng_Man_LPF100v1.5_plus_Add_7.5v1.1_7.51RN_2.pdf MultiMAX FCC &amp;amp; CE Manual plus Addendums - ENGLISH (addendums first followed by manual)]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://wp2.pocketwizard.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/03/394MultiMAX_CE_Multi-Language_Quick_Guide_-_Firmware_7xx.pdf CE Multilingual Quick Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://pocketwizard.com/manuals/ PocketWizard Manuals and Quick Guides].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are looking for Custom ID information, or want to understand triggering at large sporting events, read our section on [[Multiuser Environments]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you&#039;re having trouble with your MultiMAX, check out our [[MultiMAX FAQ]] page!&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Long_Range_Performance&amp;diff=1574</id>
		<title>Long Range Performance</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Long_Range_Performance&amp;diff=1574"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Specifications|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=Antenna performance comparisons.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=LongRangePerformanceGraphic.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Long distance performance from your PocketWizards depends on the orientation and position of the radios.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whenever possible, try to maintain a line of sight between the radios and keep the antennas parallel. While radio does not require line of sight, it does help dramatically.  Make sure the radios are not near any large metal, concrete, or high water-content objects. People and trees are mostly water!  Make sure they are not blocked by these objects or by hills.  Do not mount the radios close to the ground – try to have them several feet above the Earth or building floors whenever possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maintain at least 36&amp;quot; (~ 1 meter) distance between antennas. Avoid direct antenna contact with anything metallic. “Dead spots” have a number of causes, but the solution is usually the same: move the radio a few inches or feet away from the problem area. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;SPECIAL NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Some Canon flash models emit RF interference that can reduce the effective operating range of many radio slaves, including PocketWizards and especially the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6.  Those models include: 430EX, 430EX III-RT, 580EX, 580EX II and others. See the [[Canon Compatibility]] page for more information.  For those model flashes, please consider the mounting suggestions in the pictures above to optimize range.  If using Canon’s off shoe cord OC-E3, consider adding a ferrite clamp on the cable near the flash to further increase range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Range Extending Options=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orientation==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Solutions for improved range performance with the Canon 430EX, 430EX III-RT, 580EX and 580EX II flashes.&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- These flashes emit high levels of RF interference that can affect any PocketWizard radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- NOTE: The Canon 600EX-RT II, 600EX-RT, 430EX II, 550EX, 420EX and 270EX have excellent range performance because they do not have high RF noise emissions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every electronic device emits some amount of unintended radio frequency (RF) noise.  These emissions can range from very little to a lot depending on many factors.  This noise can be troublesome for any radio device that depends on receiving radio signals because the RF noise may make it harder for the device to hear the incoming signal.  It’s the same as trying to listen to someone talk at a party when everyone around you is talking at the same time and the noise level is very high.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=AC5 on a Canon 580 EX II.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=AC5_image.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=224&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A few Canon flashes, including the popular 580EX II, 580EX and 430EX, emit strong RF noise across the frequency range used by PocketWizard radios, impacting both the FCC 344MHz radios used in the American market and the CE 433MHz radios used in Europe and other international markets.&lt;br /&gt;
This interference can impede the out-of-box range performance with any PocketWizard radio. We have found that the amount of interference varies from flash to flash so it is impossible to say precisely what the impact is. In our testing, we found some 580EX II&#039;s worked consistently on an FCC 344MHz FlexTT5 Transceiver in the upright position at 100 feet (33 meters) or more. However, some flashes we tested were noisier and in the worst-case scenarios, without any intervening steps to improve range, consistent working range was reduced to 30 feet (10 meters). &lt;br /&gt;
There are several ways to improve signal reception and thus increasing the range performance of the radios. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Although many of these solutions are demonstrated with a receiving FlexTT5, they can be applied to any PocketWizard radio, including the Plus and MultiMAX radios.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;  Read More About Internal Modification to Canon 580EX II reduces RF emissions.[http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/tech_bulletins/580exii_mod/ here].&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The AC5 RF Soft Shield is also available, this is your first line of defense against noisy flashes.  With the AC5 correctly installed, your range will increase substantially.  For information on how to properly install the the AC5, click [http://www.pocketwizard.com/inspirations/tutorials/ac5_install/ here].&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Use the default C2 setting on the receiving FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transceiver===&lt;br /&gt;
This channel uses a different frequency than C1 and may reduce RF noise interference and increase range from 10 to 30%.  You can also try other channels that operate at different frequencies, especially around 345 to 347 MHz, which include channels 2, 4, 5, 6 &amp;amp; 20.  A channel frequency guide can be found on the [[Channels|Channels page.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Use a FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transceiver as your transmitter and your receiver.===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a transmitter, the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transceiver has a more optimize-able antenna than the MiniTT1 Transmitter and will improve range up to 20%.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Straighten out the flash head.===&lt;br /&gt;
Lay it on its side and put the antenna in a 180º position.  This should increase range from 50 to 100%. &lt;br /&gt;
                    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Better&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Flash_straight_out.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Best&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Flash_best.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Orient your antenna so that the tip of the antenna is a vertical straight line with the opposite corner of the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transceiver.===  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Yes, it&#039;s a bit contorted but it works.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FlexOptimal.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Optimal Antenna Position]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Hardware Options=&lt;br /&gt;
==Use a Canon OC-E3 cord.==&lt;br /&gt;
Ideally, use the cord with a ferrite choke added to the end of the cord nearest the flash, to separate the flash from the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transceiver.&lt;br /&gt;
For best performance, the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 should be 18” or more away from the flash and ideally positioned above it (the higher the radio, the better the reception). For best results, the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 should be positioned at least five feet off the ground.  This should increase range from 200 to 500%.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Better&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Flex_below_flash.jpg‎&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width= 200&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Best&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Flex_above_flash.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
| image-width= 200&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Ferrite Choke&lt;br /&gt;
| image=564Optimize-0318.jpg‎  &lt;br /&gt;
| image-width= 200&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mount your flash on one light stand and your FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transceiver on another stand.==&lt;br /&gt;
Just be sure there is at least 18&amp;quot; between the Flash and the FlexTT5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Use a wide dual light bracket to separate the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transciever from the flash. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Dual Flash Bracket with OC-E3 cord.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Dualflashbracket.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=250&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
- Use a Manfrotto Superclamp and Flexible Arm attached to a light stand, as seen here when used with a softbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left |caption=Rear View.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Flashsoftbox2.jpg‎  &lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=250&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left |caption= Front view.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Flashsoftbox.jpg‎  &lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=250&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Use flashes that have no noise issues.==&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=270EX Speedlite.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=270EX.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=150}}&lt;br /&gt;
These flashes include the 600EX-RT II, 600EX-RT, 430EX II,  550EX and the 270EX. The 430EX II provides almost as much light as the bigger 580EX II. This flash is smaller and less expensive then the 580EX II.  Another alternative is the 270EX flash.  The range of this flash is almost as good as the 430EX II.  It is compact and easy to carry with the FlexTT5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Use a PocketWizard designed AC7 Hard Shield for Canon Speedlites.==&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=AC7 Hard Shield.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=AC7.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=200}}&lt;br /&gt;
To enhance the ControlTL™ System range performance when paired with the Canon 580EX, 580EX II and 430EX flashes, PocketWizard developed the AC7 Hard Shield. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The body of the AC7 Hard Shield is made with a material that effectively blocks RF interference (EMI) from clouding the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 antenna.  To block noise traveling through  connections in the hot shoe, an electronic filter has been added to a hot shoe built into the AC7.  Combined, the AC7 shield allows the FlexTT5 to receive transmissions at distances 300 to 500% farther then before and well within the range of most off-camera lighting needs.  [[AC7 RF Hard Shield|Read more...]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Use a PocketWizard designed AC5 Soft Shield for Canon Speedlites.==&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=AC5 Soft Shield.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=AC5_image.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=200}}&lt;br /&gt;
The AC5 RF Soft Shield was designed to block the RF emissions from certain flashes (580EX II, 580EX and 430EX) from interfering with the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6, allowing the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 to work at considerably longer range.  For proper performance the AC5 must be installed correctly. You can see how to properly install the AC5 Soft Shield [http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=AC5_RF_Soft_Shield here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Additional Resources=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Looking for additional information on RF and long range radio performance? Check out our [[RF Resources]] page!&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=High_Speed_Sync&amp;diff=1573</id>
		<title>High Speed Sync</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=High_Speed_Sync&amp;diff=1573"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|PowerTracking|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MiniTT1, FlexTT5, and FlexTT6 support High Speed Sync (HSS) for Canon and FP Sync for Nikon. No configuration is necessary for the radios. &lt;br /&gt;
*If you have a Nikon camera, adjust the Flash Sync Speed setting in the Custom menu to 1/250s (AutoFP) for most cameras. The D600 and D610 need to be set to 1/200s (AutoFP). &lt;br /&gt;
*If you are using a Canon flash as an on-camera flash, attached to the transmitting radio, the Master flash needs to be set to HSS via the flash&#039;s menu. It is not necessary to set remote Canon flashes to HSS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HSS/FP is seamlessly engaged with the default settings at appropriate shutter speeds, letting you synchronize flashes that support HSS/FP at any speed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keep in mind that flashes actually pulse and act as a continuous light in this mode, which significantly reduces effective flash power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read more about the available options for high speed photography with any flash: [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See your Canon Speedlite documentation for High Speed Sync details for your specific flash model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See your Nikon Speedlight documentation for Auto FP Sync details for your specific camera and flash.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Getting_Started&amp;diff=1572</id>
		<title>Getting Started</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Getting_Started&amp;diff=1572"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Thank you for using PocketWizard radios!&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PocketWizard radios run on sophisticated firmware that is updated regularly. While the radios are shipped from the factory with the most updated version, sometimes new firmware is released between the time of it leaving our warehouse to being sold to a consumer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class =&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #fccccc;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a PocketWizard radio with a mini-b USB connection, you can update or upgrade the firmware in your radios. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IMPORTANT NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; PocketWizard now has two different frequency protocols. Legacy firmware has been our standard for the past 30 years. The E Release is our new system and was introduced in September 2019. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;YOUR RADIOS MUST ALL USE THE SAME FIRMWARE PROTOCOL (LEGACY OR E RELEASE) OR THEY WILL NOT WORK TOGETHER.&#039;&#039;&#039; Please see the [[PocketWizard Firmware|PocketWizard Firmware]] page for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plus Ve users: there will be an app coming for Bluetooth updates for your radio. At this time, you have the most current version of firmware installed in your new Plus Ve. They will not be updated through the PocketWizard Utility program.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PlusX users: If you want to upgrade to the E Release firmware, you can send the radio in to us. Please [https://pocketwizard.com/contact contact us] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a radio without a USB port, like a MAX, Plus, Plus II, PlusX, or older MultiMAX, you do not need to update. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s important to make sure you have the newest firmware and that all of your radios are using the same version. To check and update the radios, you&#039;ll first need to install the PocketWizard Utility onto your computer then update them through the program. Follow the steps below, just click the Expand option on the option that matches your equipment. You will need a [https://pocketwizard.com/products/replacement-mini-b-to-usb-cable-2/ standard mini B to mini USB data cable] to update the radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class =&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|New! Raven &#039;&#039;&#039;[https://pocketwizard.com/products-radios-raven/ Learn more]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Raven.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====1. Download the PocketWizard Utility====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Windows&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Attention Google Chrome Browser Users:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:Black;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Occasionally there are times when Google Chrome will not properly download the files linked below by simply clicking on the links. To resolve this issue, right-click on the links and select &amp;quot;Save link as...&amp;quot;, then select a location to download the file to. The download will proceed normally from there. Or you can copy the link for the PocketWizard Utility program and paste it into a new tab, which should also start the download. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To update Legacy firmware in your radios or to upgrade to the E Release, first download the [https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Setup%20v2.10.exe PocketWizard Utility Setup 2.10] for Windows versions 7 (SP1), 8.1, and 10. &lt;br /&gt;
#* You will need to uninstall the previous version of the PocketWizard Utility before installing Version 2.10. Click [[PocketWizard Utility FAQ#Try a complete uninstall and re-install of the Utility|here]] for instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the setup program to the directory of your choice (usually the Downloads folder)&lt;br /&gt;
# Run the setup program and follow the installation instructions.  HIGHLY RECOMMENDED - Right click the setup program and &amp;quot;Run as Administrator&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# The PocketWizard Utility is now installed in your Start Menu.  Find it there and run it!  You can delete the setup program. HIGHLY RECOMMENDED - Right click the program and &amp;quot;Run as Administrator&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Mac&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Attention Google Chrome Browser Users:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:Black;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Occasionally there are times when Google Chrome will not properly download the files linked below by simply clicking on the links. To resolve this issue, right-click on the links and select &amp;quot;Save link as...&amp;quot;, then select a location to download the file to. The download will proceed normally from there. Or you can copy the link for the PocketWizard Utility program and paste it into a new tab, which should also start the download. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To update Legacy firmware in your radios or to upgrade to the E Release, first download the correct Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
##If you have macOS Monterey (12), Big Sur (11), Catalina (10.15), or Mojave (10.14), you can use our 64-bit Utility. We have not tested Ventura (13) yet but have not had any reported issues. Click here to download [https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Installer%202.12.dmg PocketWizard Utility Installer 2.12]. The release notes can be downloaded [https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/8/8f/Utility_2.12_beta.pdf here].&lt;br /&gt;
##If you are using an older version of macOS, you can download our 32-bit version. For OS X and macOS versions 10.8 (Mountain Lion) through High Sierra (10.12), use [https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Installer%202.10.dmg PocketWizard Utility Installer 2.10]. Mojave (10.14) can use either version of the Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the Installer Disk Image file (.dmg) to the directory of your choice (usually the Downloads folder)&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the downloaded .dmg file&lt;br /&gt;
# Run the PocketWizard installer package within the Disk Image, and follow the installation prompts&lt;br /&gt;
# The PocketWizard Utility is now installed in your Applications folder.  Find it there and run it!  You can delete the Installer Disk Image file (.dmg)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====2. Check for Updates====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IMPORTANT NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; When you click the Update radio button, for most radios, you will see 2 firmware protocol options available - &amp;quot;Free&amp;quot; (Legacy firmware) or &amp;quot;Paid&amp;quot; (E Release firmware). You can see more details about the firmware options [[PocketWizard Firmware | here]]. All of your radios must use the same firmware protocol. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MiniTT1, FlexTT5, FlexTT6, PowerST4, and PowerMC2&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your radio to your computer via a mini-B to USB data cable&lt;br /&gt;
# The connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Update Tab, click &amp;quot;Update Firmware&amp;quot;, which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio. For the FlexTT5, FlexTT6, and PowerMC2, you can choose between Legacy (&amp;quot;free&amp;quot;) or E Release (&amp;quot;paid&amp;quot;). Please see the [[PocketWizard Firmware]] page for details. The MiniTT1 and PowerST4 cannot be upgraded to the E Release. All of your radios must use the same protocol, either Legacy or E Release, as the systems use different frequencies. Click on the box you want.&lt;br /&gt;
## For Legacy Firmware: click OK. Click OK in the confirmation window&lt;br /&gt;
## For E Release Firmware: enter your email address in the field provided and click Find and Apply License. If it finds the license, proceed to install the firmware. Once installed, the Firmware License will be tied to that serial number and it is non-transferable. If it does not find the license, you may need to purchase one. Visit our [https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PocketWizard_E_Release#How_do_I_update_to_the_E_Release.3F E Release Firmware] page to learn more about licenses. &lt;br /&gt;
# The Utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.&lt;br /&gt;
# After the Utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer. You do not need to &amp;quot;eject&amp;quot; the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding TEST as you power on the radio for about 15 seconds, until you see 4 green blinks in a row. [[Factory Reset|Click here to view a video of this reset process]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Plus III / IIIe or Plus IV / IVe&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your radio to your computer via a mini-B to USB data cable&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the Utility recognizes your radio, the connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window. You will also see the firmware, hardware, and loader versions of the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Update Tab, click &amp;quot;Update Firmware&amp;quot;, which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio. You can choose between Legacy (&amp;quot;free&amp;quot;) or E Release (&amp;quot;paid&amp;quot;). Please see the [[PocketWizard Firmware]] page for details. All of your radios must use the same protocol, either Legacy or E Release, as the systems use different frequencies. Click the box to select the option you want. &lt;br /&gt;
## For Legacy Firmware: click OK. Click OK in the confirmation window&lt;br /&gt;
## For E Release Firmware: enter your email address in the field provided and click Find and Apply License. If it finds the license, proceed to install the firmware. Once installed, the Firmware License will be tied to that serial number and it is non-transferable. If it does not find the license, you may need to purchase one. Visit our [https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PocketWizard_E_Release#How_do_I_update_to_the_E_Release.3F E Release Firmware] page to learn more about licenses. &lt;br /&gt;
# The Utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.&lt;br /&gt;
# After the Utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer, and make sure the radio is turned off. You do not need to &amp;quot;eject&amp;quot; the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding the TEST button as you power on the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MultiMAX, MultiMAX II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility and connect a mini-B to USB data cable to the computer but not to your MultiMAX.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable USB Mode on the MultiMAX:&lt;br /&gt;
#* Turn off the MultiMAX&lt;br /&gt;
#* Hold the Backlight button (between TEST and MENU), and connect the mini-B to USB data cable to your MultiMAX.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Continue to hold the Backlight button, and move the power switch to Transmit&lt;br /&gt;
#* Release the Backlight button. The LED on top of the radio should blink. &lt;br /&gt;
# The connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Note the current Firmware Version of the connected radio. If the Firmware Version matches the Current Versions listed below, skip steps below and proceed to the next radio. NOTE: The E Release is not available for the MultiMAX or MultiMAX II. These radios can only use the Legacy firmware.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Update Tab, click Check for Updates, which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.&lt;br /&gt;
# After the Utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer, and move the power switch off. You do not need to &amp;quot;eject&amp;quot; the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding the C key as you power on the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Current Firmware Versions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align: center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;Radio&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;Firmware Version&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;Release Date&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;Release Notes / Current Docs&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|MiniTT1 / FlexTT5 Canon &lt;br /&gt;
|{{Latestcanon}}&lt;br /&gt;
|6/8/2017&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/b/bc/MiniTT1_FlexTT5_Canon_6.905_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|MiniTT1 / FlexTT5 Nikon&lt;br /&gt;
|{{Latestnikon}}&lt;br /&gt;
|4/26/2019&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/2/25/MiniTT1_FlexTT5_Nikon_3.906.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|FlexTT5 Panasonic&lt;br /&gt;
|{{Latestpanasonic}}&lt;br /&gt;
|8/24/2017&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/6/66/Panasonic_FlexTT5_Firmware_Release_Notes_1.132.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|FlexTT6 Canon&lt;br /&gt;
|{{Latestflextt6}}&lt;br /&gt;
|8/24/2017&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/b/b5/FlexTT6_Canon_7.003_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|PowerMC2&lt;br /&gt;
|{{Latestmc2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|6/11/2013&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wp2.pocketwizard.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/03/84310802_v1.2_PowerMC2_QG_WEB_USE_ONLY.pdf Quick Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|PowerST4&lt;br /&gt;
|{{Latestst4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|6/11/2013&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wp2.pocketwizard.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/03/806PowerST4_Quick_Guide_V1.0_English.pdf Quick Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|Plus III&lt;br /&gt;
|{{LatestP3}}&lt;br /&gt;
|4/26/2019&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/d/de/Plus_III_1.210_firmware_release_notes_v2.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|Plus IIIe&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;2.740/2.840&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|5/30/2023&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=File:Plus_III_2.740_and_2.840_firmware_release_notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|Plus IV&lt;br /&gt;
|{{LatestP4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|3/1/2016&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|Plus IVe&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;2.605&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|12/11/2019&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=File:Plus_IVe_2.605_firmware_release_notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|MultiMAX&lt;br /&gt;
|{{Latestmax}}&lt;br /&gt;
|4/1/2014&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wp2.pocketwizard.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/03/733MM3_Eng_Man_LPF100v1.5_plus_Add_7.5v1.1_7.51RN_2.pdf Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|MultiMAX II&lt;br /&gt;
|{{LatestMM2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|4/26/2019&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/9/9c/MultiMAX_II_Firmware_Release_Notes_8.111.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Information about current Beta firmware (if any) is [[Beta_Firmware|available here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====3. First Time Setup====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MiniTT1, FlexTT5, &amp;amp; FlexTT6 - Canon&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For the radio that will be used as the transmitter attached to your camera, change the Camera Model setting to match the camera the radio will be attached to for Configuration C1. This setting is located under the Misc tab when your radio is connected to the PocketWizard Utility. Make sure to Apply Changes in the bottom left of the Utility window after applying this setting. Once the radio has briefly disappeared and reappeared in the Utility window (which confirms the settings have been applied to the radio), you can disconnect the USB cable. [[File:Misc.jpg|500px|center|Misc Tab]]  This step is only required once, or when the camera model changes. &lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonQuick}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MiniTT1 &amp;amp; FlexTT5 - Nikon&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Set your camera to use Auto-FP. On most Nikon Cameras, this is Custom Function e1, located under the Pencil menu. This setting should be set to the slowest shutter speed with the &amp;quot;(Auto FP)&amp;quot; option. Most Nikon cameras will use &amp;quot;1/250 (Auto FP)&amp;quot;, although some will be 1/200 (Auto FP)&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your receiving flashes to their respective FlexTT5&#039;s. Turn the flash on, and set it to the normal TTL mode - NOT &amp;quot;Master&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Slave&amp;quot; mode. Then, turn the FlexTT5 on to Configuration C1. Within a few seconds, a low power flash will be emitted from the directly-connected flash, confirming the flash and FlexTT5 are communicating through the hotshoe properly.&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Turn the radio on to Configuration C1.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on the camera, and set to 1/160th shutter speed. Take a test shot with the camera at this shutter speed - the remote flash will fire, but may not sync properly (this is a Calibration Shot for the radio). Take a second test shot, and your remote flashes will fire a TTL exposure!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 1 is only required once, or when you set up a new camera. The normal power-up sequence is Steps 2-4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These steps are for basic TTL operation.&lt;br /&gt;
Using an AC3? [https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Ac3 Continue Here]&lt;br /&gt;
Using a Master Nikon flash? [https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Advanced_Wireless_TTL Continue Here]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;PowerST4&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your PowerST4 to your remote Elinchrom Flash, and power on the flash unit. The radio will power on when the flash is turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
# Follow the above instructions for starting up a Canon or Nikon transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# You will now be triggering your PowerST4! Use the in-camera Flash Exposure Compensation settings to adjust the power levels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use your AC3 or Canon / Nikon master flash controls to adjust the manual power level of the connected flash. See the respective links above.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;PowerMC2&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your PowerMC2 to your remote Einstein flash, and power on the flash unit. The radio will power on when the flash is turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the Einstein&#039;s LCD to change the Channel and Zone settings to channel: &amp;quot;CTL-01&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Zone A&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Follow the above instructions for starting up a Canon or Nikon transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# You will now be triggering your PowerMC2! Use the in-camera Flash Exposure Compensation settings to adjust the power levels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use your AC3 or Canon / Nikon master flash controls to adjust the manual power level of the connected flash. See the respective links above.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Plus III, Plus IV, MultiMAX, MultiMAX II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# With all equipment powered off, connect your remote radio to the camera or flash you&#039;d like to trigger (with appropriate [https://www.pocketwizard.com/products/cable_accessory/ cable])&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your transmitting radio to the hotshoe of your camera (or for a remote camera, simply have the radio in your hand)&lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the remote radio, the remote flash, and the transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Ensure the Plus III/IV&#039;s are set to TxRx mode, or for a MultiMAX that the transmitting radio is set to Transmit, and the receiver to Receive mode.&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the Channels and Zones to match.&lt;br /&gt;
# Take a test shot, or press the TEST button, and the remote unit will fire!&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====4. Further Reading====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For more information about specific topics, continue reading here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PocketWizard Firmware]] Explains the difference between Legacy and E Release firmware.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PocketWizard E Release]] Information about our new firmware protocol and how to upgrade or downgrade your radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Channels]] Details about the frequency each PocketWizard Channel uses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[HyperSync]] How to achieve higher sync speeds with studio strobes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And for more radio-specific information, start here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Plus III FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PlusX FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[MultiMAX FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PowerMC2 FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PowerST4 FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PocketWizard Utility FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Firmware_Release_Notes&amp;diff=1571</id>
		<title>Firmware Release Notes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Firmware_Release_Notes&amp;diff=1571"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;All PocketWizard radios with a USB port can be easily updated to the latest firmware using the [[PocketWizard Utility]]. Check the table below for links to firmware downloads, release notes, and quick guides.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Current PocketWizard Firmware and Release Notes====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!|Radio&lt;br /&gt;
!|Firmware Ver&lt;br /&gt;
!|Release Date&lt;br /&gt;
!|Release Notes / Current Docs&lt;br /&gt;
!|Quick Guide&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Plus III]]&lt;br /&gt;
|1.210&lt;br /&gt;
|04/11/16&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/d/de/Plus_III_1.210_firmware_release_notes_v2.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/manual/ Quick Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MultiMAX]]&lt;br /&gt;
|7.53&lt;br /&gt;
|08/08/13&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wp2.pocketwizard.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/03/733MM3_Eng_Man_LPF100v1.5_plus_Add_7.5v1.1_7.51RN_2.pdf Manual + Addendums]&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/manual/ Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[PowerMC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|2.400&lt;br /&gt;
|06/11/13&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wp2.pocketwizard.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/03/84310802_v1.2_PowerMC2_QG_WEB_USE_ONLY.pdf Quick Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/manual/ Quick Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[PowerST4]]&lt;br /&gt;
|5.400&lt;br /&gt;
|06/11/13&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wp2.pocketwizard.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/03/806PowerST4_Quick_Guide_V1.0_English.pdf Quick Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/manual/ Quick Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Archived PocketWizard Firmware and Release Notes====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!|Radio&lt;br /&gt;
!|Firmware Ver&lt;br /&gt;
!|Release Date&lt;br /&gt;
!|Release Notes / Current Docs&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Nikon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|3.818&lt;br /&gt;
|08/01/16&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/6/60/MiniFlex_Nikon_3.8XX_beta.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Nikon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|3.818&lt;br /&gt;
|08/01/16&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/6/60/MiniFlex_Nikon_3.8XX_beta.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Nikon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|3.800&lt;br /&gt;
|02/20/15&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/3/33/MiniTT1FlexTT5_Nikon_3.800_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Nikon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|3.800&lt;br /&gt;
|02/20/15&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/3/33/MiniTT1FlexTT5_Nikon_3.800_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Nikon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|3.700&lt;br /&gt;
|08/05/14&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/8/8e/MiniTT1FlexTT5_Nikon_3.700_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|FlexTT5/Nikon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|3.700&lt;br /&gt;
|08/05/14&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/8/8e/MiniTT1FlexTT5_Nikon_3.700_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Nikon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|3.400&lt;br /&gt;
|06/11/13&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/8/86/Nikon_MiniTT1FlexTT5_Release_Notes_3.400_FINAL.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|FlexTT5/Nikon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|3.400&lt;br /&gt;
|06/11/13&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/8/86/Nikon_MiniTT1FlexTT5_Release_Notes_3.400_FINAL.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Nikon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|3.150&lt;br /&gt;
|08/06/12&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/3/30/Nikon_MiniTT1_FlexTT5_Firmware_Release_Notes_3.150_d.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|FlexTT5/Nikon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|3.150&lt;br /&gt;
|08/06/12&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/3/30/Nikon_MiniTT1_FlexTT5_Firmware_Release_Notes_3.150_d.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Nikon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|3.003&lt;br /&gt;
|09/27/11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/b/bc/Nikon_Mini_Flex_Firmware_Release_Notes_3.003.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|FlexTT5/Nikon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|3.003&lt;br /&gt;
|09/27/11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/b/bc/Nikon_Mini_Flex_Firmware_Release_Notes_3.003.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Nikon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|3.000&lt;br /&gt;
|09/01/11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/f/f4/Nikon_Mini_Flex_Firmware_Release_Notes_3.000.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|FlexTT5/Nikon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|3.000&lt;br /&gt;
|09/01/11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/f/f4/Nikon_Mini_Flex_Firmware_Release_Notes_3.000.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Nikon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|2.100&lt;br /&gt;
|01/14/11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/7/72/NIKON_Release_Notes_firmware_2.100.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|FlexTT5/Nikon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|2.100&lt;br /&gt;
|01/14/11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/7/72/NIKON_Release_Notes_firmware_2.100.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!|Radio&lt;br /&gt;
!|Firmware Ver&lt;br /&gt;
!|Release Date&lt;br /&gt;
!|Release Notes / Current Docs&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|6.900&lt;br /&gt;
|04/11/16&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/2/27/MiniFlex_Canon_6.9XX.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|FlexTT5/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|6.900&lt;br /&gt;
|04/11/16&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/2/27/MiniFlex_Canon_6.9XX.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|6.800&lt;br /&gt;
|02/20/15&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/c/cf/MiniTT1FlexTT5_Canon_6_800_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|FlexTT5/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|6.800&lt;br /&gt;
|02/20/15&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/c/cf/MiniTT1FlexTT5_Canon_6_800_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|6.726&lt;br /&gt;
|01/15/15&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/c/c6/Canon_MiniTT1_FlexTT5_BETA_firmware_v6.726.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|FlexTT5/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|6.726&lt;br /&gt;
|01/15/15&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/c/c6/Canon_MiniTT1_FlexTT5_BETA_firmware_v6.726.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|6.700&lt;br /&gt;
|07/31/14&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/c/c5/MiniTT1FlexTT5_Canon_6_700_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|FlexTT5/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|6.700&lt;br /&gt;
|07/31/14&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/c/c5/MiniTT1FlexTT5_Canon_6_700_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|6.400&lt;br /&gt;
|06/11/13&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/2/21/Canon_MiniTT1FlexTT5ReleaseNotes_6.400Final.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|FlexTT5/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|6.400&lt;br /&gt;
|06/11/13&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/2/21/Canon_MiniTT1FlexTT5ReleaseNotes_6.400Final.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|6.200&lt;br /&gt;
|12/19/12&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/c/c8/Canon_MiniTT1_FlexTT5_Firmware_Release_Notes_6.200_d.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|FlexTT5/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|6.200&lt;br /&gt;
|12/19/12&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/c/c8/Canon_MiniTT1_FlexTT5_Firmware_Release_Notes_6.200_d.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|6.150&lt;br /&gt;
|08/06/12&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/c/cf/Canon_MiniTT1_FlexTT5_Firmware_Release_Notes_6.150_d.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|FlexTT5/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|6.150&lt;br /&gt;
|08/06/12&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/c/cf/Canon_MiniTT1_FlexTT5_Firmware_Release_Notes_6.150_d.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|6.000&lt;br /&gt;
|09/01/11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/2/2d/Canon_Mini_Flex_Firmware_Release_Notes_6.000.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|FlexTT5/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|6.000&lt;br /&gt;
|09/01/11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/2/2d/Canon_Mini_Flex_Firmware_Release_Notes_6.000.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|5.200&lt;br /&gt;
|11/03/10&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/2/27/Manual_Addendum_5.200.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|FlexTT5/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|5.200&lt;br /&gt;
|11/03/10&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/2/27/Manual_Addendum_5.200.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|5.150&lt;br /&gt;
|08/16/10&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/0/06/Mini_Flex_Canon_Manual_Addendum_5.150.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|FlexTT5/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|5.150&lt;br /&gt;
|08/16/10&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/0/06/Mini_Flex_Canon_Manual_Addendum_5.150.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|5.000&lt;br /&gt;
|12/29/09&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/7/72/Mini_Flex_Canon_Manual_Addendum_v5.000.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|FlexTT5/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|5.000&lt;br /&gt;
|12/29/09&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/7/72/Mini_Flex_Canon_Manual_Addendum_v5.000.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|4.300&lt;br /&gt;
|07/10/09&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/d/dc/Mini_Flex_Canon_Manual_Addendum_v4.300.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|FlexTT5/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|4.300&lt;br /&gt;
|07/10/09&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/d/dc/Mini_Flex_Canon_Manual_Addendum_v4.300.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|4.250&lt;br /&gt;
|04/28/09&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/e/e1/Mini_Flex_Canon_Manual_Addendum_v4.250.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|FlexTT5/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|4.250&lt;br /&gt;
|04/28/09&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/e/e1/Mini_Flex_Canon_Manual_Addendum_v4.250.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|4.100&lt;br /&gt;
|04/02/09&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/7/73/Mini_Flex_Canon_Manual_Addendum_4.100.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|FlexTT5/Canon]]&lt;br /&gt;
|4.100&lt;br /&gt;
|04/02/09&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/7/73/Mini_Flex_Canon_Manual_Addendum_4.100.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!|Radio&lt;br /&gt;
!|Firmware Ver&lt;br /&gt;
!|Release Date&lt;br /&gt;
!|Release Notes / Current Docs&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[PowerMC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|2.200&lt;br /&gt;
|07/18/11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/5/55/PowerMC2_Firmware_2.200_ReleaseNotes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!|Radio&lt;br /&gt;
!|Firmware Ver&lt;br /&gt;
!|Release Date&lt;br /&gt;
!|Release Notes / Current Docs&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[PowerST4]]&lt;br /&gt;
|5.100&lt;br /&gt;
|09/01/11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/0/0e/ST4_Firmware_Release_Notes_5.100.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[PowerST4]]&lt;br /&gt;
|5.001&lt;br /&gt;
|01/24/11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/c/ca/PowerST4_Manual_Realease_Notes_5.001.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Common.css&amp;diff=1570</id>
		<title>Common.css</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Common.css&amp;diff=1570"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;/* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */&lt;br /&gt;
/* &amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;css&amp;quot;&amp;gt; */&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Main page fixes */&lt;br /&gt;
#interwiki-completelist {&lt;br /&gt;
    font-weight: bold;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
body.page-Main_Page #ca-delete {&lt;br /&gt;
    display: none !important;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
body.page-Main_Page #mp-topbanner {&lt;br /&gt;
   clear: both;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Edit window toolbar */&lt;br /&gt;
#toolbar {&lt;br /&gt;
    height: 22px;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin-bottom: 6px;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Margins for &amp;lt;ol&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt; */&lt;br /&gt;
#content ol, #content ul,&lt;br /&gt;
#mw_content ol, #mw_content ul {&lt;br /&gt;
  margin-bottom: 0.5em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Make the list of references smaller */&lt;br /&gt;
ol.references {&lt;br /&gt;
    font-size: 100%;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.references-small { &lt;br /&gt;
    font-size: 90%;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* VALIDATOR NOTICE: the following is correct, but the W3C validator doesn&#039;t accept it */&lt;br /&gt;
/* -moz-* is a vendor-specific extension (CSS 2.1 4.1.2.1) */&lt;br /&gt;
/* column-count is from the CSS3 module &amp;quot;CSS Multi-column Layout&amp;quot; */&lt;br /&gt;
/* Please ignore any validator errors caused by these two lines */&lt;br /&gt;
.references-2column {&lt;br /&gt;
    font-size: 90%;&lt;br /&gt;
    -moz-column-count: 2;&lt;br /&gt;
    -webkit-column-count: 2;&lt;br /&gt;
    column-count: 2;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Highlight clicked reference in blue to help navigation */&lt;br /&gt;
ol.references &amp;gt; li:target,&lt;br /&gt;
sup.reference:target,&lt;br /&gt;
cite:target { &lt;br /&gt;
    background-color: #DEF;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Ensure refs in table headers and the like aren&#039;t bold or italic */&lt;br /&gt;
sup.reference {&lt;br /&gt;
    font-weight: normal;&lt;br /&gt;
    font-style: normal;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Styling for citations */&lt;br /&gt;
cite {&lt;br /&gt;
    font-style: normal;&lt;br /&gt;
    word-wrap: break-word;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* For linked citation numbers and document IDs, where&lt;br /&gt;
   the number need not be shown on a screen or a handheld,&lt;br /&gt;
   but should be included in the printed version&lt;br /&gt;
*/&lt;br /&gt;
@media screen, handheld, projection {&lt;br /&gt;
    cite *.printonly {&lt;br /&gt;
        display: none;&lt;br /&gt;
    }&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* wikitable/prettytable class for skinning normal tables */&lt;br /&gt;
table.wikitable,&lt;br /&gt;
table.prettytable {&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 1em 1em 1em 0;&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #f9f9f9;&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px #aaa solid;&lt;br /&gt;
    border-collapse: collapse;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.wikitable th, .wikitable td,&lt;br /&gt;
.prettytable th, .prettytable td {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px #aaa solid;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 0.2em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.wikitable th,&lt;br /&gt;
.prettytable th {&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #f2f2f2;&lt;br /&gt;
    text-align: center;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.wikitable caption,&lt;br /&gt;
.prettytable caption {&lt;br /&gt;
    font-weight: bold;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Default skin for navigation boxes */&lt;br /&gt;
table.navbox {            /* Navbox container style */&lt;br /&gt;
  border: 1px solid #aaa;&lt;br /&gt;
  width: 100%; &lt;br /&gt;
  margin: auto;&lt;br /&gt;
  clear: both;&lt;br /&gt;
  font-size: 88%;&lt;br /&gt;
  text-align: center;&lt;br /&gt;
  padding: 1px;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.navbox + table.navbox {  /* Single pixel border between adjacent navboxes */&lt;br /&gt;
  margin-top: -1px;            /* (doesn&#039;t work for IE6, but that&#039;s okay)       */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.navbox-title,&lt;br /&gt;
.navbox-abovebelow,&lt;br /&gt;
table.navbox th {&lt;br /&gt;
  text-align: center;      /* Title and above/below styles */&lt;br /&gt;
  padding-left: 1em;&lt;br /&gt;
  padding-right: 1em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.navbox-group {            /* Group style */&lt;br /&gt;
  white-space: nowrap;&lt;br /&gt;
  text-align: right;&lt;br /&gt;
  font-weight: bold;&lt;br /&gt;
  padding-left: 1em;&lt;br /&gt;
  padding-right: 1em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.navbox, .navbox-subgroup {&lt;br /&gt;
  background: #fdfdfd;     /* Background color */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.navbox-list {&lt;br /&gt;
  border-color: #fdfdfd;   /* Must match background color */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.navbox-title,&lt;br /&gt;
table.navbox th {&lt;br /&gt;
  background: #ccccff;     /* Level 1 color */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.navbox-abovebelow,&lt;br /&gt;
.navbox-group,&lt;br /&gt;
.navbox-subgroup .navbox-title {&lt;br /&gt;
  background: #ddddff;     /* Level 2 color */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.navbox-subgroup .navbox-group, .navbox-subgroup .navbox-abovebelow {&lt;br /&gt;
  background: #e6e6ff;     /* Level 3 color */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.navbox-even {&lt;br /&gt;
  background: #f7f7f7;     /* Even row striping */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.navbox-odd {&lt;br /&gt;
  background: transparent; /* Odd row striping */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
.collapseButton {          /* &#039;show&#039;/&#039;hide&#039; buttons created dynamically */&lt;br /&gt;
    float: right;          /* by the CollapsibleTables javascript in    */&lt;br /&gt;
    font-weight: normal;   /* [[MediaWiki:Common.js]]are styled here    */&lt;br /&gt;
    text-align: right;     /* so they can be customised.                */&lt;br /&gt;
    width: auto;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.navbox .collapseButton {  /* In navboxes, the show/hide button balances */&lt;br /&gt;
    width: 6em;            /* the vde links from [[Template:Tnavbar]],   */&lt;br /&gt;
}                          /* so they need to be the same width.         */&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Infobox template style */&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #aaa;&lt;br /&gt;
    background-color: #f9f9f9;&lt;br /&gt;
    color: black;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 0.5em 0 0.5em 1em;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 0.2em;&lt;br /&gt;
    float: right;&lt;br /&gt;
    clear: right;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox td,&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox th {&lt;br /&gt;
    vertical-align: top;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox caption {&lt;br /&gt;
    font-size: larger;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.bordered {&lt;br /&gt;
    border-collapse: collapse;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.bordered td,&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.bordered th {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #aaa;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.bordered .borderless td,&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.bordered .borderless th {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.sisterproject {&lt;br /&gt;
    width: 20em;&lt;br /&gt;
    font-size: 90%;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.standard-talk {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #c0c090;&lt;br /&gt;
    background-color: #f8eaba;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.standard-talk.bordered td,&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.standard-talk.bordered th {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #c0c090;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* styles for bordered infobox with merged rows */&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.bordered .mergedtoprow td,&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.bordered .mergedtoprow th {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
    border-top: 1px solid #aaa;&lt;br /&gt;
    border-right: 1px solid #aaa;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.bordered .mergedrow td,&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.bordered .mergedrow th {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
    border-right: 1px solid #aaa;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Styles for geography infoboxes, eg countries,&lt;br /&gt;
   country subdivisions, cities, etc.            */&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.geography {&lt;br /&gt;
    text-align: left;&lt;br /&gt;
    border-collapse: collapse;&lt;br /&gt;
    line-height: 1.2em; &lt;br /&gt;
    font-size: 90%;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.geography  td,&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.geography  th {&lt;br /&gt;
    border-top: solid 1px #aaa;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 0.4em 0.6em 0.4em 0.6em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.geography .mergedtoprow td,&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.geography .mergedtoprow th {&lt;br /&gt;
    border-top: solid 1px #aaa;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 0.4em 0.6em 0.2em 0.6em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.geography .mergedrow td,&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.geography .mergedrow th {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 0 0.6em 0.2em 0.6em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.geography .mergedbottomrow td,&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.geography .mergedbottomrow th {&lt;br /&gt;
    border-top: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
    border-bottom: solid 1px #aaa;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 0 0.6em 0.4em 0.6em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.geography .maptable td,&lt;br /&gt;
.infobox.geography .maptable th {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Makes redirects appear in italics in categories and on [[Special:Allpages]] */&lt;br /&gt;
.redirect-in-category, .allpagesredirect {&lt;br /&gt;
    font-style: italic;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Icons for medialist templates [[Template:Listen]],&lt;br /&gt;
   [[Template:Multi-listen_start]], [[Template:Video]],&lt;br /&gt;
   [[Template:Multi-video_start]]&lt;br /&gt;
*/&lt;br /&gt;
div.listenlist {&lt;br /&gt;
    background:&lt;br /&gt;
        none;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding-left: 40px;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Style rules for media list templates */&lt;br /&gt;
div.medialist {&lt;br /&gt;
    min-height: 50px;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 1em;&lt;br /&gt;
    background-position: top left;&lt;br /&gt;
    background-repeat: no-repeat;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
div.medialist ul {&lt;br /&gt;
    list-style-type: none; &lt;br /&gt;
    list-style-image: none;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
div.medialist ul li {&lt;br /&gt;
    padding-bottom: 0.5em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
div.medialist ul li li {&lt;br /&gt;
    font-size: 91%;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding-bottom: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Change the external link icon to an Adobe icon for all PDF files&lt;br /&gt;
   in browsers that support these CSS selectors, like Mozilla and Opera */&lt;br /&gt;
#bodyContent a[href$=&amp;quot;.pdf&amp;quot;].external, &lt;br /&gt;
#bodyContent a[href*=&amp;quot;.pdf?&amp;quot;].external, &lt;br /&gt;
#bodyContent a[href*=&amp;quot;.pdf#&amp;quot;].external,&lt;br /&gt;
#bodyContent a[href$=&amp;quot;.PDF&amp;quot;].external, &lt;br /&gt;
#bodyContent a[href*=&amp;quot;.PDF?&amp;quot;].external, &lt;br /&gt;
#bodyContent a[href*=&amp;quot;.PDF#&amp;quot;].external,&lt;br /&gt;
#mw_content  a[href$=&amp;quot;.pdf&amp;quot;].external, &lt;br /&gt;
#mw_content  a[href*=&amp;quot;.pdf?&amp;quot;].external, &lt;br /&gt;
#mw_content  a[href*=&amp;quot;.pdf#&amp;quot;].external,&lt;br /&gt;
#mw_content  a[href$=&amp;quot;.PDF&amp;quot;].external, &lt;br /&gt;
#mw_content  a[href*=&amp;quot;.PDF?&amp;quot;].external, &lt;br /&gt;
#mw_content  a[href*=&amp;quot;.PDF#&amp;quot;].external {&lt;br /&gt;
    background: &lt;br /&gt;
        url(&amp;quot;http://upload.wikimedia.org/wikipedia/commons/thumb/2/23/Icons-mini-file_acrobat.gif/15px-Icons-mini-file_acrobat.gif&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
        center right no-repeat;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding-right: 16px;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Change the external link icon to an Adobe icon anywhere the PDFlink class&lt;br /&gt;
   is used (notably Template:PDFlink). This works in IE, unlike the above. */&lt;br /&gt;
#bodyContent span.PDFlink a,&lt;br /&gt;
#mw_content span.PDFlink a {&lt;br /&gt;
    background: &lt;br /&gt;
        url(&amp;quot;http://upload.wikimedia.org/wikipedia/commons/thumb/2/23/Icons-mini-file_acrobat.gif/15px-Icons-mini-file_acrobat.gif&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
        center right no-repeat;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding-right: 17px;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Remove link styling. Already defined in monobook&lt;br /&gt;
   and modern, but not defined in the other skins. Bug 18708 */&lt;br /&gt;
#bodyContent .plainlinks a {&lt;br /&gt;
    background: none !important;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 0 !important;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Content in columns with CSS instead of tables [[Template:Columns]] */&lt;br /&gt;
div.columns-2 div.column {&lt;br /&gt;
    float: left;&lt;br /&gt;
    width: 50%;&lt;br /&gt;
    min-width: 300px;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
div.columns-3 div.column {&lt;br /&gt;
    float: left;&lt;br /&gt;
    width: 33.3%;&lt;br /&gt;
    min-width: 200px;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
div.columns-4 div.column {&lt;br /&gt;
    float: left;&lt;br /&gt;
    width: 25%;&lt;br /&gt;
    min-width: 150px;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
div.columns-5 div.column {&lt;br /&gt;
    float: left;&lt;br /&gt;
    width: 20%;&lt;br /&gt;
    min-width: 120px;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Make sure that &amp;quot;external references&amp;quot; from templates like [[Template:Ref]] &lt;br /&gt;
   do not get URL expansion, not even when printed. The anchor itself has &lt;br /&gt;
   class &amp;quot;external autonumber&amp;quot; and the url expansion is inserted when printing &lt;br /&gt;
   (see the old MediaWiki commonPrint.css behavior) using the&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;quot;:after&amp;quot; pseudo-element.&lt;br /&gt;
*/&lt;br /&gt;
.nourlexpansion a.external.text:after,&lt;br /&gt;
.nourlexpansion a.external.autonumber:after {&lt;br /&gt;
    display: none !important;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* The legacy implementation of this was with &amp;quot;plainlinksneverexpand&amp;quot;, which&lt;br /&gt;
   also simulated &amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;.  &amp;quot;plainlinksneverexpand&amp;quot; is deprecated and &lt;br /&gt;
   should be replaced with &amp;quot;plainlinks nourlexpansion&amp;quot;.  When this has been&lt;br /&gt;
   done, the rules below can be removed.&lt;br /&gt;
*/&lt;br /&gt;
.plainlinksneverexpand a {&lt;br /&gt;
    background: none !important;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 0 !important;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.plainlinksneverexpand a.external.text:after,&lt;br /&gt;
.plainlinksneverexpand a.external.autonumber:after {&lt;br /&gt;
    display: none !important;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Messagebox templates */&lt;br /&gt;
.messagebox {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #aaa;&lt;br /&gt;
    background-color: #f9f9f9;&lt;br /&gt;
    width: 80%;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 0 auto 1em auto;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: .2em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.messagebox.merge {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #c0b8cc;&lt;br /&gt;
    background-color: #f0e5ff;&lt;br /&gt;
    text-align: center;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.messagebox.cleanup {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #9f9fff;&lt;br /&gt;
    background-color: #efefff;&lt;br /&gt;
    text-align: center;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.messagebox.standard-talk {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #c0c090;&lt;br /&gt;
    background-color: #f8eaba;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 4px auto;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
/* For old WikiProject banners inside banner shells. */&lt;br /&gt;
.mbox-inside .standard-talk,&lt;br /&gt;
.messagebox.nested-talk {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #c0c090;&lt;br /&gt;
    background-color: #f8eaba;&lt;br /&gt;
    width: 100%;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 2px 0;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 2px;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.messagebox.small {&lt;br /&gt;
    width: 238px;&lt;br /&gt;
    font-size: 85%;&lt;br /&gt;
    float: right;&lt;br /&gt;
    clear: both;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 0 0 1em 1em;&lt;br /&gt;
    line-height: 1.25em; &lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.messagebox.small-talk {&lt;br /&gt;
    width: 238px;&lt;br /&gt;
    font-size: 85%;&lt;br /&gt;
    float: right;&lt;br /&gt;
    clear: both;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 0 0 1em 1em;&lt;br /&gt;
    line-height: 1.25em; &lt;br /&gt;
    background: #F8EABA;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Cell sizes for ambox/tmbox/imbox/cmbox/ombox/fmbox/dmbox message boxes */&lt;br /&gt;
th.mbox-text, td.mbox-text {     /* The message body cell(s) */&lt;br /&gt;
    border: none; &lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 0.25em 0.9em;       /* 0.9em left/right */&lt;br /&gt;
    width: 100%;    /* Make all mboxes the same width regardless of text length */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
td.mbox-image {                  /* The left image cell */&lt;br /&gt;
    border: none; &lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 2px 0 2px 0.9em;    /* 0.9em left, 0px right */&lt;br /&gt;
    text-align: center; &lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
td.mbox-imageright {             /* The right image cell */&lt;br /&gt;
    border: none;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 2px 0.9em 2px 0;    /* 0px left, 0.9em right */&lt;br /&gt;
    text-align: center; &lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
td.mbox-empty-cell {         /* An empty narrow cell */&lt;br /&gt;
    border: none;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 0px;&lt;br /&gt;
    width: 1px;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Article message box styles */&lt;br /&gt;
table.ambox {&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 0px 10%;   /* 10% = Will not overlap with other elements */&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #aaa; &lt;br /&gt;
    border-left: 10px solid #1e90ff;    /* Default &amp;quot;notice&amp;quot; blue */&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #fbfbfb; &lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.ambox + table.ambox {   /* Single border between stacked boxes. */&lt;br /&gt;
    margin-top: -1px;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.ambox th.mbox-text, &lt;br /&gt;
.ambox td.mbox-text {            /* The message body cell(s) */&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 0.25em 0.5em;       /* 0.5em left/right */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.ambox td.mbox-image {           /* The left image cell */&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 2px 0 2px 0.5em;    /* 0.5em left, 0px right */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.ambox td.mbox-imageright {      /* The right image cell */&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 2px 0.5em 2px 0;    /* 0px left, 0.5em right */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
table.ambox-notice {&lt;br /&gt;
    border-left: 10px solid #1e90ff;    /* Blue */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.ambox-speedy {&lt;br /&gt;
    border-left: 10px solid #b22222;    /* Red */&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #fee;                   /* Pink */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.ambox-delete {&lt;br /&gt;
    border-left: 10px solid #b22222;    /* Red */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.ambox-content {&lt;br /&gt;
    border-left: 10px solid #f28500;    /* Orange */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.ambox-style {&lt;br /&gt;
    border-left: 10px solid #f4c430;    /* Yellow */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.ambox-move {&lt;br /&gt;
    border-left: 10px solid #9932cc;    /* Purple */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.ambox-protection {&lt;br /&gt;
    border-left: 10px solid #bba;       /* Gray-gold */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Image message box styles */&lt;br /&gt;
table.imbox {&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 4px 10%; &lt;br /&gt;
    border-collapse: collapse; &lt;br /&gt;
    border: 3px solid #1e90ff;    /* Default &amp;quot;notice&amp;quot; blue */&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #fbfbfb;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.imbox .mbox-text .imbox {    /* For imboxes inside imbox-text cells. */&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 0 -0.5em;    /* 0.9 - 0.5 = 0.4em left/right. */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.mbox-inside .imbox {    /* For imboxes inside other templates. */&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 4px;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
table.imbox-notice {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 3px solid #1e90ff;    /* Blue */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.imbox-speedy {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 3px solid #b22222;    /* Red */&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #fee;             /* Pink */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.imbox-delete {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 3px solid #b22222;    /* Red */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.imbox-content {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 3px solid #f28500;    /* Orange */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.imbox-style {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 3px solid #f4c430;    /* Yellow */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.imbox-move {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 3px solid #9932cc;    /* Purple */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.imbox-protection {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 3px solid #bba;       /* Gray-gold */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.imbox-license {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 3px solid #88a;       /* Dark gray */&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #f7f8ff;          /* Light gray */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.imbox-featured {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 3px solid #cba135;    /* Brown-gold */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Category message box styles */&lt;br /&gt;
table.cmbox {&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 3px 10%;&lt;br /&gt;
    border-collapse: collapse;&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #aaa; &lt;br /&gt;
    background: #DFE8FF;    /* Default &amp;quot;notice&amp;quot; blue */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
table.cmbox-notice {&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #D8E8FF;    /* Blue */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.cmbox-speedy {&lt;br /&gt;
    margin-top: 4px;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin-bottom: 4px;&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 4px solid #b22222;    /* Red */&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #FFDBDB;          /* Pink */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.cmbox-delete {&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #FFDBDB;    /* Red */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.cmbox-content {&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #FFE7CE;    /* Orange */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.cmbox-style {&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #FFF9DB;    /* Yellow */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.cmbox-move {&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #E4D8FF;    /* Purple */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.cmbox-protection {&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #EFEFE1;    /* Gray-gold */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Other pages message box styles */&lt;br /&gt;
table.ombox {&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 4px 10%; &lt;br /&gt;
    border-collapse: collapse; &lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #aaa;       /* Default &amp;quot;notice&amp;quot; gray */&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #f9f9f9;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
table.ombox-notice {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #aaa;       /* Gray */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.ombox-speedy {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 2px solid #b22222;    /* Red */&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #fee;             /* Pink */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.ombox-delete {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 2px solid #b22222;    /* Red */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.ombox-content {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #f28500;    /* Orange */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.ombox-style {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #f4c430;    /* Yellow */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.ombox-move {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #9932cc;    /* Purple */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.ombox-protection {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 2px solid #bba;       /* Gray-gold */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Talk page message box styles */&lt;br /&gt;
table.tmbox {&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 4px 10%;&lt;br /&gt;
    border-collapse: collapse;&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #c0c090;    /* Default &amp;quot;notice&amp;quot; gray-brown */&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #f8eaba;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.mediawiki .mbox-inside .tmbox { /* For tmboxes inside other templates. The &amp;quot;mediawiki&amp;quot; */&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 2px 0;               /* class ensures that this declaration overrides other */&lt;br /&gt;
    width: 100%;  /* For Safari and Opera */     /* styles (including mbox-small above) */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.mbox-inside .tmbox.mbox-small { /* &amp;quot;small&amp;quot; tmboxes should not be small when  */&lt;br /&gt;
    line-height: 1.5em;          /* also &amp;quot;nested&amp;quot;, so reset styles that are   */   &lt;br /&gt;
    font-size: 100%;             /* set in &amp;quot;mbox-small&amp;quot; above.                */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
table.tmbox-speedy {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 2px solid #b22222;    /* Red */&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #fee;             /* Pink */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.tmbox-delete {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 2px solid #b22222;    /* Red */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.tmbox-content {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 2px solid #f28500;    /* Orange */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.tmbox-style {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 2px solid #f4c430;    /* Yellow */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.tmbox-move {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 2px solid #9932cc;    /* Purple */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.tmbox-protection,&lt;br /&gt;
table.tmbox-notice {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #c0c090;    /* Gray-brown */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Disambig and set index box styles */&lt;br /&gt;
table.dmbox {&lt;br /&gt;
    clear: both; &lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 0.9em 1em; &lt;br /&gt;
    border-top: 1px solid #ccc; &lt;br /&gt;
    border-bottom: 1px solid #ccc; &lt;br /&gt;
    background: transparent;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Footer and header message box styles */&lt;br /&gt;
table.fmbox {&lt;br /&gt;
    clear: both;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 0.2em 0;&lt;br /&gt;
    width: 100%;&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #aaa;&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #f9f9f9;     /* Default &amp;quot;system&amp;quot; gray */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.fmbox-system {&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #f9f9f9;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.fmbox-warning {&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #bb7070;  /* Dark pink */&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #ffdbdb;        /* Pink */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
table.fmbox-editnotice {&lt;br /&gt;
    background: transparent;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
/* Div based &amp;quot;warning&amp;quot; style fmbox messages. */&lt;br /&gt;
div.mw-warning-with-logexcerpt,&lt;br /&gt;
div.mw-lag-warn-high,&lt;br /&gt;
div.mw-cascadeprotectedwarning {&lt;br /&gt;
    clear: both;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 0.2em 0;&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #bb7070;&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #ffdbdb;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 0.25em 0.9em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
/* Div based &amp;quot;system&amp;quot; style fmbox messages. Used in &lt;br /&gt;
   [[MediaWiki:Noarticletext]] and [[MediaWiki:Readonly lag]]. */&lt;br /&gt;
div.mw-lag-warn-normal,&lt;br /&gt;
div.noarticletext,&lt;br /&gt;
div.fmbox-system {&lt;br /&gt;
    clear: both;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 0.2em 0;&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #aaa;&lt;br /&gt;
    background: #f9f9f9;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 0.25em 0.9em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* These mbox-small classes must be placed after all other &lt;br /&gt;
   ambox/tmbox/ombox etc classes. &amp;quot;body.mediawiki&amp;quot; is so &lt;br /&gt;
   they override &amp;quot;table.ambox + table.ambox&amp;quot; above. */&lt;br /&gt;
body.mediawiki table.mbox-small {   /* For the &amp;quot;small=yes&amp;quot; option. */&lt;br /&gt;
    clear: right;&lt;br /&gt;
    float: right;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 4px 0 4px 1em;&lt;br /&gt;
    width: 238px;&lt;br /&gt;
    font-size: 88%;&lt;br /&gt;
    line-height: 1.25em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
body.mediawiki table.mbox-small-left {   /* For the &amp;quot;small=left&amp;quot; option. */&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 4px 1em 4px 0;&lt;br /&gt;
    width: 238px;&lt;br /&gt;
    border-collapse: collapse;&lt;br /&gt;
    font-size: 88%;&lt;br /&gt;
    line-height: 1.25em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Support for Template:IPA, Template:Unicode and Template:Polytonic.&lt;br /&gt;
   The second declarations reset the styles for all browsers except&lt;br /&gt;
   IE6, which chokes on the empty comment tags. Please copy any changes&lt;br /&gt;
   to [[Template:IPA fonts]] and [[Template:Unicode fonts]].&lt;br /&gt;
*/&lt;br /&gt;
.IPA {&lt;br /&gt;
    font-family: &amp;quot;Charis SIL&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Doulos SIL&amp;quot;, Gentium, GentiumAlt,&lt;br /&gt;
                 &amp;quot;DejaVu Sans&amp;quot;, Code2000, &amp;quot;TITUS Cyberbit Basic&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
                 &amp;quot;Arial Unicode MS&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Lucida Sans Unicode&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
                 &amp;quot;Chrysanthi Unicode&amp;quot;;&lt;br /&gt;
    font-family /**/: inherit;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.Unicode {&lt;br /&gt;
    font-family: Code2000, Code2001, &amp;quot;Free Serif&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;TITUS Cyberbit Basic&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
                 &amp;quot;Doulos SIL&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Chrysanthi Unicode&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Bitstream Cyberbit&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
                 &amp;quot;Bitstream CyberBase&amp;quot;, Thryomanes, Gentium, GentiumAlt,&lt;br /&gt;
                 &amp;quot;Lucida Grande&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Free Sans&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Arial Unicode MS&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
                 &amp;quot;Microsoft Sans Serif&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Lucida Sans Unicode&amp;quot;;&lt;br /&gt;
    font-family /**/: inherit;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.latinx {&lt;br /&gt;
    font-family: Code2000, Code2001, &amp;quot;TITUS Cyberbit Basic&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Microsoft Sans Serif&amp;quot;;&lt;br /&gt;
    font-family /**/: inherit;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.polytonic {&lt;br /&gt;
    font-family: &amp;quot;Athena Unicode&amp;quot;, Gentium, &amp;quot;Palatino Linotype&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
                 &amp;quot;Arial Unicode MS&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Lucida Sans Unicode&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
                 &amp;quot;Lucida Grande&amp;quot;, Code2000; &lt;br /&gt;
    font-family /**/: inherit;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
#wpSave {&lt;br /&gt;
    font-weight: bold;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* class hiddenStructure is defunct. See the old Wikipedia hiddenStructure documentation. */&lt;br /&gt;
.hiddenStructure {&lt;br /&gt;
    display: inline ! important;&lt;br /&gt;
    color: #f00; &lt;br /&gt;
    background-color: #0f0;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* suppress missing interwiki image links where #ifexist cannot&lt;br /&gt;
   be used due to high number of requests see .hidden-redlink on &lt;br /&gt;
   http://meta.wikimedia.org/wiki/MediaWiki:Common.css&lt;br /&gt;
*/&lt;br /&gt;
.check-icon a.new {&lt;br /&gt;
    display: none; &lt;br /&gt;
    speak: none;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Removes underlines from links */&lt;br /&gt;
.nounderlines a { &lt;br /&gt;
    text-decoration: none;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Remove underline from IPA links */&lt;br /&gt;
.IPA a:link, .IPA a:visited {&lt;br /&gt;
    text-decoration: none;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Standard Navigationsleisten, aka box hiding thingy&lt;br /&gt;
   from .de.  Documentation was previously tracked under Wikipedia NavFrame. */&lt;br /&gt;
div.NavFrame {&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 4px;&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #aaa;&lt;br /&gt;
    text-align: center;&lt;br /&gt;
    border-collapse: collapse;&lt;br /&gt;
    font-size: 95%;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
div.NavFrame + div.NavFrame {&lt;br /&gt;
    border-top-style: none;&lt;br /&gt;
    border-top-style: hidden;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
div.NavPic {&lt;br /&gt;
    background-color: #fff;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 2px;&lt;br /&gt;
    float: left;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
div.NavFrame div.NavHead {&lt;br /&gt;
    height: 1.6em;&lt;br /&gt;
    font-weight: bold;&lt;br /&gt;
    background-color: #ccf;&lt;br /&gt;
    position: relative;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
div.NavFrame p {&lt;br /&gt;
    font-size: 100%;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
div.NavFrame div.NavContent {&lt;br /&gt;
    font-size: 100%;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
div.NavFrame div.NavContent p {&lt;br /&gt;
    font-size: 100%;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
div.NavEnd {&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
    line-height: 1px;&lt;br /&gt;
    clear: both;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
a.NavToggle {&lt;br /&gt;
    position: absolute;&lt;br /&gt;
    top: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
    right: 3px;&lt;br /&gt;
    font-weight: normal;&lt;br /&gt;
    font-size: 90%;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Coloured watchlist numbers */&lt;br /&gt;
.mw-plusminus-pos { color: #006400; } /* dark green */&lt;br /&gt;
.mw-plusminus-neg { color: #8B0000; } /* dark red */&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
.rellink,&lt;br /&gt;
.dablink {&lt;br /&gt;
    font-style: italic;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding-left: 2em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.rellink i,&lt;br /&gt;
.dablink i {&lt;br /&gt;
    font-style: normal;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Style for horizontal UL lists */&lt;br /&gt;
.horizontal ul {&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.horizontal li { &lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 0 0.6em 0 0.4em;&lt;br /&gt;
    display: inline;&lt;br /&gt;
    border-right: 1px solid;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.horizontal li:last-child {&lt;br /&gt;
    border-right: none;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding-right: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Allow transcluded pages to display in lists rather than a table.&lt;br /&gt;
   Compatible in Firefox; incompatible in IE6. */&lt;br /&gt;
.listify td    { display: list-item; }&lt;br /&gt;
.listify tr    { display: block; }&lt;br /&gt;
.listify table { display: block; }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Geographical coordinates defaults. See [[Template:Coord/link]]&lt;br /&gt;
   for how these are used. The classes &amp;quot;geo&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;longitude&amp;quot;, and&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;quot;latitude&amp;quot; are used by the [[Geo microformat]].&lt;br /&gt;
 */&lt;br /&gt;
.geo-default, .geo-dms, .geo-dec  { display: inline; }&lt;br /&gt;
.geo-nondefault, .geo-multi-punct { display: none; }&lt;br /&gt;
.longitude, .latitude             { white-space: nowrap; }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* When &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nonumtoc&amp;quot;&amp;gt; is used on the table of contents,&lt;br /&gt;
   the ToC will display without numbers */&lt;br /&gt;
.nonumtoc .tocnumber { display: none; }&lt;br /&gt;
.nonumtoc #toc ul,&lt;br /&gt;
.nonumtoc .toc ul {&lt;br /&gt;
    line-height: 1.5em;&lt;br /&gt;
    list-style: none;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: .3em 0 0;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.nonumtoc #toc ul ul, &lt;br /&gt;
.nonumtoc .toc ul ul { &lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 0 0 0 2em; &lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Allow limiting of which header levels are shown in a TOC;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toclimit-3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;, for instance, will limit to&lt;br /&gt;
   showing ==headings== and ===headings=== but no further&lt;br /&gt;
   (as long as there are no =headings= on the page, which&lt;br /&gt;
   there shouldn&#039;t be according to the MoS).&lt;br /&gt;
 */&lt;br /&gt;
.toclimit-2 .toclevel-2,&lt;br /&gt;
.toclimit-3 .toclevel-3,&lt;br /&gt;
.toclimit-4 .toclevel-4,&lt;br /&gt;
.toclimit-5 .toclevel-5,&lt;br /&gt;
.toclimit-6 .toclevel-6,&lt;br /&gt;
.toclimit-7 .toclevel-7 { display: none; }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Styling for Template:Quote */&lt;br /&gt;
blockquote.templatequote { &lt;br /&gt;
     margin-top: 0; &lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
blockquote.templatequote div.templatequotecite { &lt;br /&gt;
    line-height: 1em;&lt;br /&gt;
    text-align: left;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding-left: 2em;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin-top: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
blockquote.templatequote div.templatequotecite cite {&lt;br /&gt;
    font-size: 85%;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
div.user-block {&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 5px;&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #A9A9A9;&lt;br /&gt;
    background-color: #FFEFD5;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Prevent line breaks in silly places: &lt;br /&gt;
   1) links when we don&#039;t want them to&lt;br /&gt;
   2) HTML formulae&lt;br /&gt;
   3) Ref tags with group names &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Note&amp;quot;&amp;gt; --&amp;gt; &amp;quot;[Note 1]&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*/&lt;br /&gt;
.nowraplinks a,&lt;br /&gt;
span.texhtml,&lt;br /&gt;
sup.reference a { white-space: nowrap; }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* For template documentation */&lt;br /&gt;
.template-documentation {&lt;br /&gt;
    clear: both;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin: 1em 0 0 0;&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #aaa; &lt;br /&gt;
    background-color: #ecfcf4; &lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 5px;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
.thumbinner {&lt;br /&gt;
    min-width: 100px;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Inline divs in ImageMaps (code borrowed from de.wiki) */&lt;br /&gt;
.imagemap-inline div {&lt;br /&gt;
    display: inline;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Increase the height of the image upload box */&lt;br /&gt;
#wpUploadDescription {&lt;br /&gt;
    height: 13em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Reduce line-height for &amp;lt;sup&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;sub&amp;gt; */&lt;br /&gt;
sup, sub {&lt;br /&gt;
    line-height: 1em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* The backgrounds for galleries. */&lt;br /&gt;
#content .gallerybox div.thumb {&lt;br /&gt;
    background-color: #F9F9F9;   /* Light gray padding */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
/* Put a chequered background behind images, only visible if they have transparency */&lt;br /&gt;
.gallerybox .thumb img,&lt;br /&gt;
#file img {&lt;br /&gt;
    background: white url(&amp;quot;http://upload.wikimedia.org/wikipedia/commons/5/5d/Checker-16x16.png&amp;quot;) repeat;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
/* But no chequered background on articles, user pages or portals. */&lt;br /&gt;
.ns-0 .gallerybox .thumb img,&lt;br /&gt;
.ns-2 .gallerybox .thumb img,&lt;br /&gt;
.ns-100 .gallerybox .thumb img {&lt;br /&gt;
    background: white;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Prevent floating boxes from overlapping any category listings,&lt;br /&gt;
   file histories, edit previews, and edit [Show changes] views */&lt;br /&gt;
#mw-subcategories, #mw-pages, #mw-category-media, &lt;br /&gt;
#filehistory, #wikiPreview, #wikiDiff {&lt;br /&gt;
    clear: both;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* Selectively hide headers in WikiProject banners */&lt;br /&gt;
.wpb .wpb-header             { display: none; }&lt;br /&gt;
.wpbs-inner .wpb .wpb-header { display: block; }     /* for IE */&lt;br /&gt;
.wpbs-inner .wpb .wpb-header { display: table-row; } /* for real browsers */&lt;br /&gt;
.wpbs-inner .wpb-outside     { display: none; }      /* hide things that should only display outside shells */&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
/* &amp;lt;/source&amp;gt; */&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_XTi&amp;diff=1569</id>
		<title>Canon Rebel XTi</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_XTi&amp;diff=1569"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS Digital Rebel XTi (400D) and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==XTi Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the XTi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the XTi is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_XT&amp;diff=1568</id>
		<title>Canon Rebel XT</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_XT&amp;diff=1568"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS Digital Rebel XT (350D) and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==XT Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the XT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the XT is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_XSi&amp;diff=1567</id>
		<title>Canon Rebel XSi</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_XSi&amp;diff=1567"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS Rebel XSi (450D) and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==XSi Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the XSi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the XSi is version available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_XS&amp;diff=1566</id>
		<title>Canon Rebel XS</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_XS&amp;diff=1566"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS Rebel XS (1000D) and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==XS Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the XS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the XS is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_T5i&amp;diff=1565</id>
		<title>Canon Rebel T5i</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_T5i&amp;diff=1565"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS Rebel T5i (700D) and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==T5i (700D) Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the T5i (700D).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the Canon Rebel T5i (700D) is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_T4i&amp;diff=1564</id>
		<title>Canon Rebel T4i</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_T4i&amp;diff=1564"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS Rebel T4i (650D) and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==T4i Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the Canon Rebel T4i (650D) is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_T3i&amp;diff=1563</id>
		<title>Canon Rebel T3i</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_T3i&amp;diff=1563"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS Rebel T3i (600D) and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==T3i Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the T3i.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the T3i is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_T3&amp;diff=1562</id>
		<title>Canon Rebel T3</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_T3&amp;diff=1562"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS Rebel T3 (110D) and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==T3 Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the T3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the T3 is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_T2i&amp;diff=1561</id>
		<title>Canon Rebel T2i</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_T2i&amp;diff=1561"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS Rebel T2i (550D) and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==T2i Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the T2i.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the T2i is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_T1i&amp;diff=1560</id>
		<title>Canon Rebel T1i</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_T1i&amp;diff=1560"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS Rebel T1i (500D) and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==T1i Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the T1i.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the T1i is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_7D_Mark_II&amp;diff=1559</id>
		<title>Canon 7D Mark II</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_7D_Mark_II&amp;diff=1559"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Review this page for information about the Canon EOS 7D Mark II and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==7D Mark II Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the 7D Mark II.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===PocketWizard Compatibility (Transmitting Radios)===&lt;br /&gt;
The 7D Mark II is compatible with any Plus or MultiMAX PocketWizard in manual mode, up to X-sync.&lt;br /&gt;
The camera is TTL compatible with the MiniTT1, FlexTT5, FlexTT6, or Raven by Fusion TLC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the 7D Mark II is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_7D&amp;diff=1558</id>
		<title>Canon 7D</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_7D&amp;diff=1558"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS 7D and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==7D Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the 7D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the 7D is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==HyperSync Performance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the tables below to view the 7D&#039;s HyperSync performance with a specific flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonHyperSyncSteps}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Einstein and PowerMC2===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|Einstein E640&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/b/bc/7D_Einstein_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/d/d8/7D_Einstein_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerMC2 PowerMC2 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Example images were captured using the Einstein&#039;s &amp;quot;Color&amp;quot; mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Elinchrom and PowerST4===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|Ranger RX S-Head&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/4/4e/7D_RangerRX_SHead_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/6/6d/7D_RangerRX_SHead_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerST4 PowerST4 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|Ranger RX A-Head&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/1/1f/7D_RangerRX_AHead_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/6/6c/7D_RangerRX_AHead_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerST4 PowerST4 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AlienBees and FlexTT5 with AC9 AlienBees Adapter===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|AlienBees B1600&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/d/d6/7D_AlienBeesB1600_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/2/2c/7D_AlienBeesB1600_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_FlexTT5_and_AC9_AlienBees_Adapter FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===White Lightning and FlexTT5 with AC9 AlienBees Adapter===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|White Lightning X3200&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/1/15/7D_WhiteLightningX3200_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/5/5a/7D_WhiteLightningX3200_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_FlexTT5_and_AC9_AlienBees_Adapter FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Don&#039;t see your gear?}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_6D&amp;diff=1557</id>
		<title>Canon 6D</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_6D&amp;diff=1557"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon 6D and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==6D Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the 6D is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==HyperSync Performance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the tables below to view the 6D&#039;s HyperSync performance with a specific flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonHyperSyncSteps}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Einstein and PowerMC2===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|Einstein E640&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/0/05/6D_EinsteinE640_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/b/bf/6D_EinsteinE640_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerMC2 PowerMC2 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Example images were captured using the Einstein&#039;s &amp;quot;Color&amp;quot; mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AlienBees and FlexTT5 with AC9 AlienBees Adapter===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|AlienBees B1600&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/8/84/6D_AlienBeesB1600_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/1/14/6D_AlienBeesB1600_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_FlexTT5_and_AC9_AlienBees_Adapter FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===White Lightning and FlexTT5 with AC9 AlienBees Adapter===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|White Lightning X3200&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/1/1c/6D_WhiteLightningX3200_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/a/a4/6D_WhiteLightningX3200_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_FlexTT5_and_AC9_AlienBees_Adapter FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Don&#039;t see your gear?}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_60D&amp;diff=1556</id>
		<title>Canon 60D</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_60D&amp;diff=1556"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS 60D and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==60D Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the 60D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the 60D is version available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_5Ds/R&amp;diff=1555</id>
		<title>Canon 5Ds/R</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_5Ds/R&amp;diff=1555"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS 5Ds/R and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5Ds/R Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the 5Ds/R.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the 5Ds/R is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==HyperSync Performance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonHyperSyncSteps}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Don&#039;t see your gear?}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_5D_Mark_III&amp;diff=1554</id>
		<title>Canon 5D Mark III</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_5D_Mark_III&amp;diff=1554"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS 5D Mark III and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5D Mark III Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the 5D Mark III.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the 5D Mark III is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==HyperSync Performance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the tables below to view the 5D Mark III&#039;s HyperSync performance with a specific flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonHyperSyncSteps}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Einstein and PowerMC2===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|Einstein E640&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/a/af/5DMarkIII_Einstein_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/5/5b/5DMarkIII_Einstein_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerMC2 PowerMC2 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Example images were captured using the Einstein&#039;s &amp;quot;Color&amp;quot; mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Elinchrom and PowerST4===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|Ranger RX S-Head&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/0/09/5DMarkIII_RangerRX_SHead_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/5/53/5DMarkIII_RangerRX_SHead_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerST4 PowerST4 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|Ranger RX A-Head&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/c/c4/5DMarkIII_RangerRX_AHead_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/8/8d/5DMarkIII_RangerRX_AHead_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerST4 PowerST4 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AlienBees and FlexTT5 with AC9 AlienBees Adapter===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|AlienBees B1600&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/a/a7/5DMarkIII_AlienBeesB1600_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/8/83/5DMarkIII_AlienBeesB1600_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_FlexTT5_and_AC9_AlienBees_Adapter FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===White Lightning and FlexTT5 with AC9 AlienBees Adapter===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|White Lightning X3200&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/0/0f/5DMarkIII_WhiteLightningX3200_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/1/1c/5DMarkIII_WhiteLightningX3200_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_FlexTT5_and_AC9_AlienBees_Adapter FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Don&#039;t see your gear?}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_5D_Mark_II&amp;diff=1553</id>
		<title>Canon 5D Mark II</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_5D_Mark_II&amp;diff=1553"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS 5D Mark II and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5D Mark II Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the 5D Mark II.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the 5D Mark II is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===FEC for Remote Power===&lt;br /&gt;
After making a camera FEC change, a half-press may be required to update remotes with the new power information.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==HyperSync Performance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the tables below to view the 5D Mark II&#039;s HyperSync performance with a specific flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonHyperSyncSteps}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Einstein and PowerMC2===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|Einstein E640&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/5/5d/5DMarkII_Einstein_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/6/6f/5DMarkII_Einstein_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerMC2 PowerMC2 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Example images were captured using the Einstein&#039;s &amp;quot;Color&amp;quot; mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Elinchrom and PowerST4===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|Ranger RX S-Head&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/3/3a/5DMarkII_RangerRX_SHead_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/d/d5/5DMarkII_RangerRX_SHead_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerST4 PowerST4 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|Ranger RX A-Head&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/7/7b/5DMarkII_RangerRX_AHead_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/2/26/5DMarkII_RangerRX_AHead_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerST4 PowerST4 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AlienBees and FlexTT5 with AC9 AlienBees Adapter===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|AlienBees B1600&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/8/8b/5DMkII_AlienBeesB1600_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/2/28/5DMkII_AlienBeesB1600_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_FlexTT5_and_AC9_AlienBees_Adapter FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===White Lightning and FlexTT5 with AC9 AlienBees Adapter===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|White Lightning X3200&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/7/72/5DMarkII_WhiteLightningX3200_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/2/23/5DMarkII_WhiteLightningX3200_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_FlexTT5_and_AC9_AlienBees_Adapter FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Don&#039;t see your gear?}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_5D&amp;diff=1552</id>
		<title>Canon 5D</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_5D&amp;diff=1552"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS 5D and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5D Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the 5D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the 5D is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1/8000th in Automatic Metering modes===&lt;br /&gt;
With some 5D models, the camera’s shutter speed can sometimes get stuck at 1/8000th or f/22 when in P, Av or Tv mode, if a Speedlite is used in the top shoe of an on-camera PocketWizard radio. This can occur with or without PocketWizard radios. There is a known bug in the camera&#039;s firmware where the camera exhibits the same symptoms, but only with a Speedlite in manual mode. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_50D&amp;diff=1551</id>
		<title>Canon 50D</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_50D&amp;diff=1551"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS 50D and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==50D Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the 50D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the 50D is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_40D&amp;diff=1550</id>
		<title>Canon 40D</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_40D&amp;diff=1550"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS 40D and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==40D Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the 40D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the 40D is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_30D&amp;diff=1549</id>
		<title>Canon 30D</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_30D&amp;diff=1549"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS 30D and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==30D Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the 30D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the 30D is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===30D as Remote Camera===&lt;br /&gt;
When remote triggering the 30D camera remotely, it must be set to “Auto Power Off – Disable” otherwise once camera sleeps, trigger will not work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_20D&amp;diff=1548</id>
		<title>Canon 20D</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_20D&amp;diff=1548"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS 20D and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==20D Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the 20D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the 20D is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1/8000th in Automatic Metering modes===&lt;br /&gt;
The camera’s shutter speed can sometimes get stuck at 1/8000th or f/22 when in P, Av or Tv mode, if a Speedlite is used in the top shoe of an on-camera PocketWizard radio. This can occur with or without PocketWizard radios. This is rare and can be remedied by power-cycling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Remote Manual Power Control with Local 580EX II===&lt;br /&gt;
If you use Remote Wireless Manual controls with a 580EX II in the top shoe of a Mini or Flex on a 20D, about 20% of the exposures result in overexposure with remote Speedlites.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_1Ds_Mark_III&amp;diff=1547</id>
		<title>Canon 1Ds Mark III</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_1Ds_Mark_III&amp;diff=1547"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS-1Ds Mark III and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1Ds Mark III Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the 1Ds Mark III.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the 1Ds Mark III is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_1Ds_Mark_II&amp;diff=1546</id>
		<title>Canon 1Ds Mark II</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_1Ds_Mark_II&amp;diff=1546"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS-1Ds Mark II and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1Ds Mark II Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the 1Ds Mark II.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the 1Ds Mark II is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_1D_X&amp;diff=1545</id>
		<title>Canon 1D X</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_1D_X&amp;diff=1545"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS-1D X and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1D X Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==HyperSync Performance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the tables below to view the 1D X&#039;s HyperSync performance with a specific flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonHyperSyncSteps}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Einstein and PowerMC2===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|Einstein E640&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/f/f8/1DX_Einstein_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/4/4f/1DX_Einstein_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerMC2 PowerMC2 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Example images were captured using the Einstein&#039;s &amp;quot;Color&amp;quot; mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Elinchrom and PowerST4===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|Ranger RX A-Head&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/a/a1/1DX_RangerRX_AHead_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/7/77/1DX_RangerRX_AHead_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerST4 PowerST4 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|Ranger RX S-Head&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/f/f7/1DX_RangerRX_SHead_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/7/74/1DX_RangerRX_SHead_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerST4 PowerST4 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AlienBees and FlexTT5 with AC9 AlienBees Adapter===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|AlienBees B1600&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/6/61/1DX_AlienBeesB1600_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/4/43/1DX_AlienBeesB1600_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_FlexTT5_and_AC9_AlienBees_Adapter FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===White Lightning and FlexTT5 with AC9 AlienBees Adapter===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|White Lightning X3200&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/d/dc/1DX_WhiteLightningX3200_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/d/d5/1DX_WhiteLightningX3200_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_FlexTT5_and_AC9_AlienBees_Adapter FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Don&#039;t see your gear?}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_1D_Mark_IV&amp;diff=1544</id>
		<title>Canon 1D Mark IV</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_1D_Mark_IV&amp;diff=1544"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS-1D Mark IV and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Camera-Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the 1D Mark IV is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==HyperSync Performance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the tables below to view the 1D Mark IV&#039;s HyperSync performance with a specific flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonHyperSyncSteps}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Einstein and PowerMC2===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|Einstein E640&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/b/bc/1DMarkIV_Einstein_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/7/7d/1DMarkIV_Einstein_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerMC2 PowerMC2 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Example images were captured using the Einstein&#039;s &amp;quot;Color&amp;quot; mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Elinchrom and PowerST4===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|Ranger RX S-Head&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/6/6e/1DMarkIV_RangerRX_SHead_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/5/58/1DMarkIV_RangerRX_SHead_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerST4 PowerST4 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|Ranger RX A-Head&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/b/b3/1DMarkIV_RangerRX_AHead_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/9/95/1DMarkIV_RangerRX_AHead_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_PowerST4 PowerST4 Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AlienBees and FlexTT5 with AC9 AlienBees Adapter===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|AlienBees B1600&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/6/6f/1DMarkIV_AlienBeesB1600_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/c/c9/1DMarkIV_AlienBeesB1600_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_FlexTT5_and_AC9_AlienBees_Adapter FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===White Lightning and FlexTT5 with AC9 AlienBees Adapter===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Flash Model&lt;br /&gt;
!Radio Setup&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|HyperSync Automation Selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|White Lightning X3200&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_ControlTL_Transmitter Transmitter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/9/94/1DMarkIV_WhiteLightningX3200_HighestEnergy_Ver11.pdf Highest Energy PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=2|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/4/41/1DMarkIV_WhiteLightningX3200_ReducedClipping_Ver11.pdf Reduced Clipping PDF]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync_Setup#How_to_Configure_the_Receiving_FlexTT5_and_AC9_AlienBees_Adapter FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter Setup]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Don&#039;t see your gear?}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_1D_Mark_II_N&amp;diff=1543</id>
		<title>Canon 1D Mark II N</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_1D_Mark_II_N&amp;diff=1543"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS-1D Mark II N and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1D Mark II N Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the 1D Mark II N.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the 1D Mark II N is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_1D_Mark_III&amp;diff=1542</id>
		<title>Canon 1D Mark III</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_1D_Mark_III&amp;diff=1542"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS-1D Mark III and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1D Mark III Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the 1D Mark III.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the 1D Mark III is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_1D_Mark_II&amp;diff=1541</id>
		<title>Canon 1D Mark II</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Canon_1D_Mark_II&amp;diff=1541"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Review this page for information about the Canon EOS-1D Mark II and its performance with PocketWizard radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonOperational}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1D Mark II Specific Operational Considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
The following operational considerations apply only to the 1D Mark II.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Camera Firmware===&lt;br /&gt;
For best results, use the latest camera body firmware. The latest firmware for the 1D Mark II is available for download at the Canon support site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1D Mark II as Remote Camera===&lt;br /&gt;
The 1D Mark II can be used as a remote camera with our Standard Channel radios or our [[ControlTL]] radios. ControlTL radios must be set to [[Misc Tab#Basic Trigger|Basic Trigger mode]]. If the radios are set to ControlTL Channels, the 1D Mark II will not trigger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NoHATT}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonSpecialNotes}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{CustomerService}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Beta_Firmware&amp;diff=1540</id>
		<title>Beta Firmware</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Beta_Firmware&amp;diff=1540"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T23:00:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Fix broken public external links on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Try out the latest [[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5]] firmware (other radios, too!) or PocketWizard Utility.  We appreciate your help testing our newest features and improvements before our official production release is available.  Anyone can participate, but you should be very comfortable using the [[PocketWizard Utility]] and be willing to provide [[#Providing_Feedback|detailed feedback]] of your experiences.  If that’s you, please read on to begin your own beta test.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current Firmware == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Release notes for current official production firmware can be found on our [[Getting Started]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must be using [[PocketWizard Utility]] version 1.54 or later before installing the latest firmware.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Canon MiniTT1 &amp;amp; FlexTT5==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Beta====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no beta firmware available at this time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Official====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current [[Canon_Compatibility|ControlTL Canon]] official production firmware is {{latestcanon}}. This release is available for both FCC and CE radios.  There is no beta release at this time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Nikon MiniTT1 &amp;amp; FlexTT5==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Beta====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current Nikon ControlTL beta firmware version is {{Nikonbeta}} and is available through the PocketWizard Utility right now. It adds support for the Nikon D850. This Beta is available for both FCC and CE radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Release notes are currently provided through the PocketWizard Utility when beta firmware is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To gain access to the beta firmware, [[Beta_Firmware#Enabling_Beta_Firmware|see below]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Official====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current [[Nikon_Compatibility|ControlTL Nikon]] official production firmware is {{latestnikon}}. This release is available for both FCC and CE radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==PowerST4 for Elinchrom==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current PowerST4 firmware is version {{latestst4}}. This release is available for both FCC and CE radios.  There is no beta release at this time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==PowerMC2 for Einstein E640==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current [[PowerMC2]] firmware is version {{latestmc2}}. There is no beta release at this time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Plus III==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Beta====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no beta firmware available at this time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Official====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current [[Plus III]] official production firmware is version 1.215. This official firmware is available for both FCC and CE radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MultiMAX==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current [[MultiMAX]] firmware is version {{latestmax}}. This release is available for both FCC and CE radios.  There is no beta release at this time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only MultiMAX&#039;s with a USB port are capable of downloading firmware.  Some older MultiMAX units do not have a USB port.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MultiMAX II==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Beta=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no Beta firmware currently available for this product.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Official=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current MultiMAX II firmware is 8.117. This official version is available for both FCC and CE radios.&lt;br /&gt;
[http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/0/06/MultiMAX_II_8.117.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enabling Beta Firmware==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Beta_Firmware_1.63.png|right|400px|How to enable the beta firmware options.]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the [[PocketWizard Utility]] and tick the box for Advanced Mode&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the blue gear in the bottom left corner of the window&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Firmware Updates&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the radio button for &amp;quot;Yes, show me beta firmware and official firmware.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK&lt;br /&gt;
#Completely close the PocketWizard Utility&lt;br /&gt;
#Re-open the PocketWizard Utility, make sure your radio is connected, and click the [[Update Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click &amp;quot;Update Firmware&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Beta_Firmware_Selection_1.63.png|right|400px|How to enable the beta firmware options.]]&lt;br /&gt;
Select the version of firmware, BETA or Official, you would like installed in your radio. Click OK and then follow the onscreen prompts&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Providing Feedback==&lt;br /&gt;
We need feedback on your experiences testing the beta firmware! Feedback can include your opinion of overall functionality or any bugs or issues you may have encountered. When providing feedback, the more detail you can provide the better. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please include the following as a minimum:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Beta firmware release version number&lt;br /&gt;
*Camera being used (brand, model # &amp;amp; firmware version)&lt;br /&gt;
*Flashes being used(brand &amp;amp; model #)&lt;br /&gt;
*PocketWizard radios in use&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The following information would also be helpful:&lt;br /&gt;
*Camera settings&lt;br /&gt;
*Flash settings&lt;br /&gt;
*Location information (indoor, outdoor)&lt;br /&gt;
*Any potential radio interference sources&lt;br /&gt;
*Anything else that may help us understand your photo environment and situation.&lt;br /&gt;
*Computer system info&lt;br /&gt;
*Best way to contact you should follow-up be necessary&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please send feedback via one of these:&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.pocketwizard.com/contact/inquiry/ PocketWizard.com Inquires Page] &lt;br /&gt;
*[mailto:betalab@pocketwizard.com betalab@pocketwizard.com] - please put &amp;quot;beta&amp;quot; in the subject line.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=PDF_Manual&amp;diff=1538</id>
		<title>PDF Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=PDF_Manual&amp;diff=1538"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T21:17:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Retire legacy PDF export messaging on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page previously linked to legacy PDF exports from the old PocketWizard wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Single-page &amp;quot;Download as PDF&amp;quot; exports are no longer supported on this site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web pages below are now the source of truth for the MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 manual content. If a curated PDF manual is brought back later, it will be linked here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Manual ==&lt;br /&gt;
:[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Key Features]]&lt;br /&gt;
;First Steps&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Getting Started]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Batteries]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Safety Warnings]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Status LED]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Compatibility&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Nikon Compatibility]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Canon Compatibility]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Channels&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Channels]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Channels (CE/Europe)]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Learn Mode]]&lt;br /&gt;
;TTL&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Basic Wireless TTL]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Advanced Wireless TTL]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[High Speed Sync]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Manual Flash&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Manual Flash]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PowerTracking]]&lt;br /&gt;
;HyperSync&lt;br /&gt;
:[[HyperSync]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[HyperSync Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]]&lt;br /&gt;
;AC3 ZoneController&lt;br /&gt;
:[[AC3 ZoneController]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Utility&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PocketWizard Utility]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Factory Reset]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Update Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Channel Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Flash Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[HyperSync/HSS Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PowerTracking Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Modeling Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Sleep Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Misc Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
;More Information&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Remote Camera Triggering]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Relay Mode]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[ControlTL Accessories]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Even More Information&lt;br /&gt;
:[[The FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Long Range Performance]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Mounting]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Beta Firmware]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Compliance]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Getting_Started&amp;diff=1535</id>
		<title>Getting Started</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Getting_Started&amp;diff=1535"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T20:44:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Sync page source from live PocketWizard wiki during staging fidelity pass&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Thank you for using PocketWizard radios!&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PocketWizard radios run on sophisticated firmware that is updated regularly. While the radios are shipped from the factory with the most updated version, sometimes new firmware is released between the time of it leaving our warehouse to being sold to a consumer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class =&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #fccccc;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a PocketWizard radio with a mini-b USB connection, you can update or upgrade the firmware in your radios. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IMPORTANT NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; PocketWizard now has two different frequency protocols. Legacy firmware has been our standard for the past 30 years. The E Release is our new system and was introduced in September 2019. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;YOUR RADIOS MUST ALL USE THE SAME FIRMWARE PROTOCOL (LEGACY OR E RELEASE) OR THEY WILL NOT WORK TOGETHER.&#039;&#039;&#039; Please see the [[PocketWizard Firmware|PocketWizard Firmware]] page for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plus Ve users: there will be an app coming for Bluetooth updates for your radio. At this time, you have the most current version of firmware installed in your new Plus Ve. They will not be updated through the PocketWizard Utility program.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PlusX users: If you want to upgrade to the E Release firmware, you can send the radio in to us. Please [https://pocketwizard.com/contact contact us] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a radio without a USB port, like a MAX, Plus, Plus II, PlusX, or older MultiMAX, you do not need to update. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s important to make sure you have the newest firmware and that all of your radios are using the same version. To check and update the radios, you&#039;ll first need to install the PocketWizard Utility onto your computer then update them through the program. Follow the steps below, just click the Expand option on the option that matches your equipment. You will need a [https://pocketwizard.com/products/replacement-mini-b-to-usb-cable-2/ standard mini B to mini USB data cable] to update the radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class =&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|New! Raven &#039;&#039;&#039;[https://pocketwizard.com/products-radios-raven/ Learn more]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Raven.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====1. Download the PocketWizard Utility====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Windows&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Attention Google Chrome Browser Users:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:Black;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Occasionally there are times when Google Chrome will not properly download the files linked below by simply clicking on the links. To resolve this issue, right-click on the links and select &amp;quot;Save link as...&amp;quot;, then select a location to download the file to. The download will proceed normally from there. Or you can copy the link for the PocketWizard Utility program and paste it into a new tab, which should also start the download. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To update Legacy firmware in your radios or to upgrade to the E Release, first download the [https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Setup%20v2.10.exe PocketWizard Utility Setup 2.10] for Windows versions 7 (SP1), 8.1, and 10. &lt;br /&gt;
#* You will need to uninstall the previous version of the PocketWizard Utility before installing Version 2.10. Click [[PocketWizard Utility FAQ#Try a complete uninstall and re-install of the Utility|here]] for instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the setup program to the directory of your choice (usually the Downloads folder)&lt;br /&gt;
# Run the setup program and follow the installation instructions.  HIGHLY RECOMMENDED - Right click the setup program and &amp;quot;Run as Administrator&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# The PocketWizard Utility is now installed in your Start Menu.  Find it there and run it!  You can delete the setup program. HIGHLY RECOMMENDED - Right click the program and &amp;quot;Run as Administrator&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Mac&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Attention Google Chrome Browser Users:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:Black;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Occasionally there are times when Google Chrome will not properly download the files linked below by simply clicking on the links. To resolve this issue, right-click on the links and select &amp;quot;Save link as...&amp;quot;, then select a location to download the file to. The download will proceed normally from there. Or you can copy the link for the PocketWizard Utility program and paste it into a new tab, which should also start the download. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To update Legacy firmware in your radios or to upgrade to the E Release, first download the correct Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
##If you have macOS Monterey (12), Big Sur (11), Catalina (10.15), or Mojave (10.14), you can use our 64-bit Utility. We have not tested Ventura (13) yet but have not had any reported issues. Click here to download [https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Installer%202.12.dmg PocketWizard Utility Installer 2.12]. The release notes can be downloaded [https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/8/8f/Utility_2.12_beta.pdf here].&lt;br /&gt;
##If you are using an older version of macOS, you can download our 32-bit version. For OS X and macOS versions 10.8 (Mountain Lion) through High Sierra (10.12), use [https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Installer%202.10.dmg PocketWizard Utility Installer 2.10]. Mojave (10.14) can use either version of the Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the Installer Disk Image file (.dmg) to the directory of your choice (usually the Downloads folder)&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the downloaded .dmg file&lt;br /&gt;
# Run the PocketWizard installer package within the Disk Image, and follow the installation prompts&lt;br /&gt;
# The PocketWizard Utility is now installed in your Applications folder.  Find it there and run it!  You can delete the Installer Disk Image file (.dmg)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====2. Check for Updates====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IMPORTANT NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; When you click the Update radio button, for most radios, you will see 2 firmware protocol options available - &amp;quot;Free&amp;quot; (Legacy firmware) or &amp;quot;Paid&amp;quot; (E Release firmware). You can see more details about the firmware options [[PocketWizard Firmware | here]]. All of your radios must use the same firmware protocol. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MiniTT1, FlexTT5, FlexTT6, PowerST4, and PowerMC2&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your radio to your computer via a mini-B to USB data cable&lt;br /&gt;
# The connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Update Tab, click &amp;quot;Update Firmware&amp;quot;, which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio. For the FlexTT5, FlexTT6, and PowerMC2, you can choose between Legacy (&amp;quot;free&amp;quot;) or E Release (&amp;quot;paid&amp;quot;). Please see the [[PocketWizard Firmware]] page for details. The MiniTT1 and PowerST4 cannot be upgraded to the E Release. All of your radios must use the same protocol, either Legacy or E Release, as the systems use different frequencies. Click on the box you want.&lt;br /&gt;
## For Legacy Firmware: click OK. Click OK in the confirmation window&lt;br /&gt;
## For E Release Firmware: enter your email address in the field provided and click Find and Apply License. If it finds the license, proceed to install the firmware. Once installed, the Firmware License will be tied to that serial number and it is non-transferable. If it does not find the license, you may need to purchase one. Visit our [https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PocketWizard_E_Release#How_do_I_update_to_the_E_Release.3F E Release Firmware] page to learn more about licenses. &lt;br /&gt;
# The Utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.&lt;br /&gt;
# After the Utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer. You do not need to &amp;quot;eject&amp;quot; the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding TEST as you power on the radio for about 15 seconds, until you see 4 green blinks in a row. [[Factory Reset|Click here to view a video of this reset process]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Plus III / IIIe or Plus IV / IVe&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your radio to your computer via a mini-B to USB data cable&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the Utility recognizes your radio, the connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window. You will also see the firmware, hardware, and loader versions of the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Update Tab, click &amp;quot;Update Firmware&amp;quot;, which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio. You can choose between Legacy (&amp;quot;free&amp;quot;) or E Release (&amp;quot;paid&amp;quot;). Please see the [[PocketWizard Firmware]] page for details. All of your radios must use the same protocol, either Legacy or E Release, as the systems use different frequencies. Click the box to select the option you want. &lt;br /&gt;
## For Legacy Firmware: click OK. Click OK in the confirmation window&lt;br /&gt;
## For E Release Firmware: enter your email address in the field provided and click Find and Apply License. If it finds the license, proceed to install the firmware. Once installed, the Firmware License will be tied to that serial number and it is non-transferable. If it does not find the license, you may need to purchase one. Visit our [https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PocketWizard_E_Release#How_do_I_update_to_the_E_Release.3F E Release Firmware] page to learn more about licenses. &lt;br /&gt;
# The Utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.&lt;br /&gt;
# After the Utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer, and make sure the radio is turned off. You do not need to &amp;quot;eject&amp;quot; the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding the TEST button as you power on the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MultiMAX, MultiMAX II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility and connect a mini-B to USB data cable to the computer but not to your MultiMAX.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable USB Mode on the MultiMAX:&lt;br /&gt;
#* Turn off the MultiMAX&lt;br /&gt;
#* Hold the Backlight button (between TEST and MENU), and connect the mini-B to USB data cable to your MultiMAX.&lt;br /&gt;
#* Continue to hold the Backlight button, and move the power switch to Transmit&lt;br /&gt;
#* Release the Backlight button. The LED on top of the radio should blink. &lt;br /&gt;
# The connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Note the current Firmware Version of the connected radio. If the Firmware Version matches the Current Versions listed below, skip steps below and proceed to the next radio. NOTE: The E Release is not available for the MultiMAX or MultiMAX II. These radios can only use the Legacy firmware.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Update Tab, click Check for Updates, which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.&lt;br /&gt;
# After the Utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer, and move the power switch off. You do not need to &amp;quot;eject&amp;quot; the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding the C key as you power on the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Current Firmware Versions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align: center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;Radio&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;Firmware Version&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;Release Date&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;Release Notes&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|MiniTT1 / FlexTT5 Canon &lt;br /&gt;
|{{Latestcanon}}&lt;br /&gt;
|6/8/2017&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/b/bc/MiniTT1_FlexTT5_Canon_6.905_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|MiniTT1 / FlexTT5 Nikon&lt;br /&gt;
|{{Latestnikon}}&lt;br /&gt;
|4/26/2019&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/2/25/MiniTT1_FlexTT5_Nikon_3.906.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|FlexTT5 Panasonic&lt;br /&gt;
|{{Latestpanasonic}}&lt;br /&gt;
|8/24/2017&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/6/66/Panasonic_FlexTT5_Firmware_Release_Notes_1.132.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|FlexTT6 Canon&lt;br /&gt;
|{{Latestflextt6}}&lt;br /&gt;
|8/24/2017&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/b/b5/FlexTT6_Canon_7.003_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|PowerMC2&lt;br /&gt;
|{{Latestmc2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|6/11/2013&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/883PowerMC2_Firmware_ReleaseNotes_2.400.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|PowerST4&lt;br /&gt;
|{{Latestst4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|6/11/2013&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/1076ST4_Firmware_Release_Notes_5.400.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|Plus III&lt;br /&gt;
|{{LatestP3}}&lt;br /&gt;
|4/26/2019&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/d/de/Plus_III_1.210_firmware_release_notes_v2.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|Plus IIIe&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;2.740/2.840&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|5/30/2023&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=File:Plus_III_2.740_and_2.840_firmware_release_notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|Plus IV&lt;br /&gt;
|{{LatestP4}}&lt;br /&gt;
|3/1/2016&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|Plus IVe&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;2.605&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|12/11/2019&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=File:Plus_IVe_2.605_firmware_release_notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|MultiMAX&lt;br /&gt;
|{{Latestmax}}&lt;br /&gt;
|4/1/2014&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/733MM3_Eng_Man_LPF100v1.5_plus_Add_7.5v1.1_7.51RN_2.pdf Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|MultiMAX II&lt;br /&gt;
|{{LatestMM2}}&lt;br /&gt;
|4/26/2019&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/9/9c/MultiMAX_II_Firmware_Release_Notes_8.111.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Information about current Beta firmware (if any) is [[Beta_Firmware|available here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====3. First Time Setup====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MiniTT1, FlexTT5, &amp;amp; FlexTT6 - Canon&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For the radio that will be used as the transmitter attached to your camera, change the Camera Model setting to match the camera the radio will be attached to for Configuration C1. This setting is located under the Misc tab when your radio is connected to the PocketWizard Utility. Make sure to Apply Changes in the bottom left of the Utility window after applying this setting. Once the radio has briefly disappeared and reappeared in the Utility window (which confirms the settings have been applied to the radio), you can disconnect the USB cable. [[File:Misc.jpg|500px|center|Misc Tab]]  This step is only required once, or when the camera model changes. &lt;br /&gt;
{{CanonQuick}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MiniTT1 &amp;amp; FlexTT5 - Nikon&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Set your camera to use Auto-FP. On most Nikon Cameras, this is Custom Function e1, located under the Pencil menu. This setting should be set to the slowest shutter speed with the &amp;quot;(Auto FP)&amp;quot; option. Most Nikon cameras will use &amp;quot;1/250 (Auto FP)&amp;quot;, although some will be 1/200 (Auto FP)&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your receiving flashes to their respective FlexTT5&#039;s. Turn the flash on, and set it to the normal TTL mode - NOT &amp;quot;Master&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Slave&amp;quot; mode. Then, turn the FlexTT5 on to Configuration C1. Within a few seconds, a low power flash will be emitted from the directly-connected flash, confirming the flash and FlexTT5 are communicating through the hotshoe properly.&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Turn the radio on to Configuration C1.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on the camera, and set to 1/160th shutter speed. Take a test shot with the camera at this shutter speed - the remote flash will fire, but may not sync properly (this is a Calibration Shot for the radio). Take a second test shot, and your remote flashes will fire a TTL exposure!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 1 is only required once, or when you set up a new camera. The normal power-up sequence is Steps 2-4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These steps are for basic TTL operation.&lt;br /&gt;
Using an AC3? [https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Ac3 Continue Here]&lt;br /&gt;
Using a Master Nikon flash? [https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Advanced_Wireless_TTL Continue Here]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;PowerST4&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your PowerST4 to your remote Elinchrom Flash, and power on the flash unit. The radio will power on when the flash is turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
# Follow the above instructions for starting up a Canon or Nikon transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# You will now be triggering your PowerST4! Use the in-camera Flash Exposure Compensation settings to adjust the power levels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use your AC3 or Canon / Nikon master flash controls to adjust the manual power level of the connected flash. See the respective links above.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;PowerMC2&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your PowerMC2 to your remote Einstein flash, and power on the flash unit. The radio will power on when the flash is turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the Einstein&#039;s LCD to change the Channel and Zone settings to channel: &amp;quot;CTL-01&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Zone A&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Follow the above instructions for starting up a Canon or Nikon transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# You will now be triggering your PowerMC2! Use the in-camera Flash Exposure Compensation settings to adjust the power levels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use your AC3 or Canon / Nikon master flash controls to adjust the manual power level of the connected flash. See the respective links above.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Plus III, Plus IV, MultiMAX, MultiMAX II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# With all equipment powered off, connect your remote radio to the camera or flash you&#039;d like to trigger (with appropriate [https://www.pocketwizard.com/products/cable_accessory/ cable])&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your transmitting radio to the hotshoe of your camera (or for a remote camera, simply have the radio in your hand)&lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the remote radio, the remote flash, and the transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Ensure the Plus III/IV&#039;s are set to TxRx mode, or for a MultiMAX that the transmitting radio is set to Transmit, and the receiver to Receive mode.&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the Channels and Zones to match.&lt;br /&gt;
# Take a test shot, or press the TEST button, and the remote unit will fire!&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====4. Further Reading====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For more information about specific topics, continue reading here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PocketWizard Firmware]] Explains the difference between Legacy and E Release firmware.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PocketWizard E Release]] Information about our new firmware protocol and how to upgrade or downgrade your radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Channels]] Details about the frequency each PocketWizard Channel uses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[HyperSync]] How to achieve higher sync speeds with studio strobes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And for more radio-specific information, start here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Plus III FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PlusX FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[MultiMAX FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PowerMC2 FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PowerST4 FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PocketWizard Utility FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=1534</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=1534"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T20:44:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Sync page source from live PocketWizard wiki during staging fidelity pass&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:PocketWizardLogo.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Hello and welcome to the PocketWizard® Wiki!&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Raven.png|thumb|right|250px|Meet the new Raven!&#039;&#039;&#039;[https://pocketwizard.com/products-radios-raven/ Learn more]&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This wiki, written exclusively by the PocketWizard support team, is for helping photographers use and understand their PocketWizard radios. This Wiki has 3 main purposes: &lt;br /&gt;
*To help you set up your new PocketWizards &lt;br /&gt;
*Provide technical support and troubleshooting&lt;br /&gt;
*Provide detailed information about your specific radio &lt;br /&gt;
You can use the search box up above to help you find something, or you can choose from one of the options below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: You can use Google Translate to view this Wiki in a different language. Go to [https://translate.google.com translate.google.com], then type &#039;&#039;wiki.pocketwizard.com&#039;&#039; into the box. Click the arrow in the box to see the new page.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==I just bought a new PocketWizard! What do I do first?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Download the Quick Guide for your radio &#039;&#039;&#039;[https://pocketwizard.com/manuals/ here]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Check your firmware!  Go to the &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Getting Started]]&#039;&#039;&#039; page to download our Utility and update your radios. (note: PlusX users do not need this step)&lt;br /&gt;
#&#039;&#039;&#039;[https://pocketwizard.com/registration/ Register your radios!]&#039;&#039;&#039; A PocketWizard radio purchased new from an authorized dealer has a 2 year warranty against manufacturer&#039;s defects. Extend your warranty to 3 years by registering them online!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class =&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color: #fccccc;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;IMPORTANT NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; If you just purchased a new Plus IIIe or Plus IVe and it is not working with your previously purchased PocketWizard radios, please &#039;&#039;&#039;[[PocketWizard Firmware|click here]]&#039;&#039;&#039; to learn about our new firmware protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Helpful links for technical support questions and common features==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;[[PocketWizard E Release|E Release]]&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
Our new firmware upgrade is a game changer! This is paid upgrade for the Plus III and Plus IV radios but you may be eligible for a free license-click [[E Release#E Release FAQs|here]] for details!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;[[The FAQ|Frequently Asked Questions]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Looking for a quick solution to a common problem?  This is a great place to check!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;[[HyperSync|Learn about HyperSync]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to sync a strobe over your camera&#039;s X-sync speed, our patented HyperSync technology might be able to help you!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Remote Camera Triggering]]&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
Did you know you can trigger your camera remotely (and you might be able to start and stop videos) using your PocketWizards?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Want more details about your PocketWizard radios?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;PocketWizard Standard Channel Radios&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[PlusX]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Plus III]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Plus IV]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[MultiMAX]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;ControlTL Technology&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|Canon and Nikon MiniTT1 and FlexTT5]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[FlexTT6|Canon FlexTT6]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[PowerMC2]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[PowerST4]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a living document.  As features change and grow, so will this wiki.  If you have a question that is not answered here (or you just can&#039;t find it!), please [https://pocketwizard.com/contact contact us directly.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also want to visit [https://pocketwizard.com PocketWizard.com].  It&#039;s a nice place, too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;6wsSFsyJTOA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;diff=1532</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Sidebar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://35.168.49.54/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;diff=1532"/>
		<updated>2026-03-29T20:25:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwstagingadmin: Remove broken PDF link on staging&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;* navigation&lt;br /&gt;
** mainpage|mainpage-description&lt;br /&gt;
** recentchanges-url|recentchanges&lt;br /&gt;
** randompage-url|randompage&lt;br /&gt;
** helppage|help&lt;br /&gt;
* Radios&lt;br /&gt;
** Raven|Raven&lt;br /&gt;
** MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5|MiniTT1 and FlexTT5&lt;br /&gt;
** FlexTT6|FlexTT6&lt;br /&gt;
** Plus_III|Plus III&lt;br /&gt;
** PlusX|PlusX&lt;br /&gt;
** Plus_II|Plus II&lt;br /&gt;
** PowerMC2|PowerMC2&lt;br /&gt;
** PowerST4|PowerST4&lt;br /&gt;
** MultiMAX|MultiMAX&lt;br /&gt;
* Popular Pages&lt;br /&gt;
** Getting_Started | Getting Started&lt;br /&gt;
** PocketWizard_Utility | PocketWizard Utility&lt;br /&gt;
** PocketWizard E Release | E Release&lt;br /&gt;
** HyperSync | HyperSync&lt;br /&gt;
** Canon_Compatibility | Canon&lt;br /&gt;
** Nikon_Compatibility | Nikon&lt;br /&gt;
** The_FAQ | The FAQ&lt;br /&gt;
* SEARCH&lt;br /&gt;
* TOOLBOX&lt;br /&gt;
* LANGUAGES&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwstagingadmin</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>